2007 Civic Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................i
A Few Words About Safe
ty................................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance.....................................................................................................................3
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................53
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ..............................................................................................109
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................179
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................191
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................209
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................253
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................277
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................291
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................295
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Accord Value Package Audio System
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Civic 2-door. You may find descriptions
of equipment and features that are not on
your particular model.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33SVAC10
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda Civic was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Introduction
i
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices
record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag
system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally
required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to
the vehicle owner.
Introduction
WARNING:
ii
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials - special handling
may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
on the vehicle.
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
These signal words mean:
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety Section
Instructions
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
A/T model is shown.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
GAUGES
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.9, 23)
AUDIO SYSTEM
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.110)
(P.9, 23)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.182)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.198)
(P.195)
(P.115)
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
FUEL FILL DOOR/
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
CLOCK
(P.173)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.57)
(P.64)
(P.73)
(P.99)
(P.101)
(P.79)
(P.97)
(P.181, 89)
(P.105)
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
1:
2:
3:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
MIRROR CONTROLS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
SEL/RESET BUTTON
TILT/
TELESCOPIC
ADJUSTMENT
(P.175)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.29)
DISPLAY CHANGE
BUTTON
HEATED MIRRORS
(P.170)
REMOTE
AUDIO
CONTROLS
VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES
CRUISE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
HORN
VEHICLE
STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF
SWITCH
(P.71)
(P.72)
(P.65)
(P.64)
(P.101)
(P.207)
(P.74)
(P.105)
(P.73)
(P.102)
(P.73)
(P.70)
3
3
1
3
2
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 13
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 15
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
...Additional Safety Precautions . 16
Additional Information About
.......................Your Seat Belts . 18
..Seat Belt System Components . 18
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 21
......Airbag System Components . 21
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 23
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26
How the Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
.............................Airbag Service . 30
...Additional Safety Precautions . 31
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 32
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 32
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 33
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 33
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 35
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 35
...Additional Safety Precautions . 35
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 37
.......................Protecting Infants . 37
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39
....................Installing a Child Seat . 40
...............................With LATCH . 41
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 43
..............................With a Tether . 45
...........Protecting Larger Children . 46
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 46
..................Using a Booster Seat . 47
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 48
...Additional Safety Precautions . 49
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 50
...................................Safety Labels . 51
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
14
32 49
211
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Don’t Drink and Drive
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Restrain All Children
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
6
Main Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(7)
(2)
(6)(4)
(7)
(5)
(2)
(11)
(9)
(10)
(12)
(8)
(1) (3)
(8)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zone
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
(12) Front Seat Belt Buckle
Tensioners
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page
for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
23
26
28
CONTINUED
Airbags
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Table of Contents
Main Menu
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do
their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
What you should do:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards.
10
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
−
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
Your vehicle has a door-
openindicatoronthe
instrument panel to indicate when
either door is not tightly closed.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Some models have auto door
locking/unlocking features. For
more information, see page .
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door
monitor indicator works.
32 36
78
79
62
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page ).74
91
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
12
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
91
94
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
14
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
18
Protecting Adults and Teens
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
16
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
If they do,
they could be very seriously
injuredinacrash.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Never let passengers ride on top of
a folded-down rear seat.
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any objects hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any objects, such as a folded-down
back seat, that are touching the
rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
22 25
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
18
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
The lap and shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page ).
14
43
CONTINUED
Lap/Shoulder Belt Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
239
do not deploy
Honda
Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
20
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly,
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
(1) Driver’s Airbag
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(12) SRS Indicator
(13) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Unit
(14) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
(15) Rear Safing Sensor
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(17) Side Curtain Airbags
(1)
(8) (12) (8) (9) (17) (2) (13) (17)
(11)
(5)
(4)
(16)
(7)
(15)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(6)
(3)
(14)
(16)
(10)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Your airbag system includes:
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page ).
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
Sensors that monitor the weight
on the front passenger’s seat. If
the weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg)
or less (the weight of an infant or
small child), the passenger’s front
airbag will be turned off (see page
).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and a front
passenger’s seat belt is latched or
unlatched (see page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
28
19
27
23
26
18
25
28
25
Additional Information About Your Airbags
22
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
25
29
29
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
less severe
more severe
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
CONTINUED
Advanced Airbags
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
Be aware that objects placed on
the passenger’s seat can also
cause the airbag to be turned off.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with
thefloormats,makesurethefloor
matbehindthefrontpassenger’s
seat is hooked to the floor mat
anchor (see page ). If it is not,
the mat may interfere with the
proper operation of the sensors
and operation of the seat.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
The rear seat-back interfering
with the reclined front passenger’s
seat-back when the rear seat is
folded down.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the affected side.
29
240
How Your Side Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
26
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if sensors in
the seat detect a child has leaned
into the side airbag’s deployment
path, the airbag will shut off.
29
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
28
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’tcome
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
58
CONTINUED
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not
not mean
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
U.S. Canada
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
Canada
U.S.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object, such as a folded-down
back seat, that is touching the rear
of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
An airbag ever inflates.
Airbag Service
30
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
If water or
another liquid soaks into the seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor and the front
passenger’s weight sensors to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not remove or modif y a front
seat without consulting your
dealer.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
Additional Safety Precautions
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
37 45
46 49
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
32
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
−
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children age 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
25
46
CONTINUED
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Small Children
Larger Children
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
Protecting Children General Guidelines
34
SUN VISOR
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
15
14
46
91
CONTINUED
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Additional Safety Precautions
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
−
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature(seepage ).
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
43 44
90
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Lock both doors and the trunk
when your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
36
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat. Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
25
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
38
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
CONTINUED
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
1.
2.
Selecting a Child Seat
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Secure the child in the child seat.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
1.
2.
3.
3.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
40
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
LOWER ANCHORS
Rigid type
BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
Adjust the head restraint to its
lowest position. Route the tether
strap over the head restraint,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
4.
6.
5.
7.
Installing a Child Seat
42
Flexible type
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. 2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
44
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), adjust the
head restraint to its lowest
position, then route the tether
strap over the head restraint.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
1.
2.
3.
43
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Installing a Child Seat
Using an Anchor
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
COVER
TETHER
STRAP
HOOK
Front
Front
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
Outer position Center position
TETHER STRAP
HOOK
ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
1.
2.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
46
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible, and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
3.
4.
5.
39
CONTINUED
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
14 46
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Larger Children
48
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the trunk open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows and
set the heating and cooling system
as shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
50
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
U.S. modelsU.S. models only
Canadian models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
RADIATOR CAP
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
Main Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Canadian modelsU.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models
Safety Labels
52
HOOD DOORJAMBS
Main Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Main Menu
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 54
............................Instrument Panel . 55
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 57
.............................................Gauges . 64
..............Display Change Button . 65
.....................................Odometer . 65
...................................Trip Meter . 65
Outside Temperature
...................................Indicator . 66
..................................Fuel Gauge . 67
...................Temperature Gauge . 67
..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 67
..................Maintenance Minder . 68
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 69
.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 70
...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 71
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 72
.................Hazard Warning Button . 73
.................Rear Window Defogger . 73
........Steering Wheel Adjustments . 74
...............................Keys and Locks . 75
........................Immobilizer System . 76
................................Ignition Switch . 77
......................................Door Locks . 78
......................Power Door Locks . 79
.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 79
.......................Remote Transmitter . 86
................................................Trunk . 89
........Emergency Trunk Opener . 90
.................................................Seats . 91
..............................Power Windows . 97
.........................................Moonroof . 99
...........................................Mirrors . 101
...............................Parking Brake . 102
.........Interior Convenience Items . 103
.....................Beverage Holders . 104
.............Console Compartment . 104
..................................Glove Box . 104
..................................Coat Hook . 105
........Accessory Power Sockets . 105
............................Vanity Mirror . 106
...................................Sun Visor . 106
...............................Interior Lights . 107
..............................Ceiling Light . 107
...................................Spotlights . 107
..........................Courtesy Light . 108
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
53
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Control Locations
54
A/T model is shown.
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
MOONROOF SWITCH
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
CLOCK
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P. 115)
(P. 110)
MIRROR CONTROLS
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETSHOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 182)
FUEL FILL DOOR/
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P. 98)
HEATING/
COOLING
CONTROLS
(P. 173)
(P. 57)
GAUGES
(P. 64)
(P. 101)
(P. 79)
(P. 97)
(P. 181, 89)
(P. 105)
(P. 73)
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.:
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
DX,DX-G(Canada),LX,EX
55
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P. 57)
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHTS
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP
LIGHTS ON
INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
TRUNK-OPEN
INDICATOR
DOOR-OPEN
INDICATOR
(P. 59)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P. 59)
(P. 58)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 58)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 58)
(P. 62)
(P. 62)
(P. 62)
(P. 57, 265)
(P. 57, 265)
(P. 57, 266)
(P. 60, 211)
(P. 62)
(P. 62)
(P. 63)
(P. 63)
(P. 63)
(P. 62)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.:
Instrument Panel
Si
56
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 60)
REV LIMIT INDICATOR
(P. 59)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P. 58)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
(P. 61)
(P. 61)
(P. 57, 265)
(P. 61)
(P. 63)
(P. 60, 211)
(P. 62)
DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR
(P. 62)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P. 59)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P. 57)
TRUNK-OPEN INDICATOR
(P. 57, 266)MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 57, 265)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
(P. 62)
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P. 58)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 63)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P. 63)
(P. 62)
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 58)
(P. 62)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P. 62)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
INDICATOR
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
See page .
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
This indicator reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
notfastenyourseatbeltbeforethe
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
18
265
265
266
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
57
This indicator has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system, side curtain
airbags, automatic seat belt
tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page .
1.
2.
28
29
267
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Side Airbag Off Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
58
U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page .
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page ).
204
76 237
Instrument Panel Indicators
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
Indicators
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
59
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you turn the steering wheel to the
full left or right position repeatedly
while stopping or driving at very low
speed, you may feel slightly harder
steering due to overheating of the
steering gear box.
Continuously driving under those
conditions could damage the power
steering system.
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and goes off
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, there is a problem
in the electric power steering system.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will not turn
off immediately. If it does not go off
after driving a short distance, or
comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be off, making the
vehicle harder to steer.
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. The
maintenance main items and sub
items will be displayed in the
information display. See page for
more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
211
Instrument Panel Indicators
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Si model only
60
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
This indicator shows you when the
engine speed is near the tachometer’s
red zone. When the engine speed
gets to near the red zone, the
indicator blinks. If you exceed the
maximum speed for the gear you are
in, the indicator stays on, and you
may feel the engine cut in and out
due to the engine speed limiter (see
page ).
To protect the engine from damage,
never drive with the tachometer in
its red zone.
This indicator has three functions:
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. See page for more
information on the VSA system.
197
1.
2.
3.
206
206
206
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Rev Limit Indicator VSA Activation Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Si model only
Si model only
Si model only
Instruments and Controls
61
REV LIMIT INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If this indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position and release the parking
brake, it means there is a problem
withtheDRL.Theremayalsobea
problem with the high beam
headlights. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page ).
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page ).
This indicator comes on if either
door is not closed tightly.
This indicator comes on if the trunk
lid is not closed tightly.
175
175
72
71
229
Canadian models only
If equipped
If equipped
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Door-open Indicator
Trunk-open Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
62
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator is located in the fuel
gauge. It comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
beeper will also sound when you
open the driver’s door.
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
for more information on the
security system. When the indicator comes on, there
is about 1.9 US gal (7.5
)offuel
remaining in the tank before the
reading reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the reading does reach E.
174
If equipped
Low Fuel IndicatorLights On Indicator Security System Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
63
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Except Si Si
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To switch the information display
between the odometer, trip meter,
and outside temperature (if
equipped), and engine oil life and
maintenance service items, press the
SEL/RESET button repeatedly.
Gauges
64
SPEEDOMETER
TRIP METER
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
FUEL
GAUGE
TACHOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
U.S. model with A/T is shown.
SEL/RESET BUTTON
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press and hold the display change
button until you hear a beep. The
speedometer, trip meter, and
odometer readings switch between
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
This meter shows the number of
miles or kilometers driven since you
last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the SEL/
RESET button repeatedly. Each trip
meter works independently, so you
can keep track of two different
distances.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, what you last
selected is displayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
This shows the total distance your
vehicle has been driven. It measures
miles or kilometers.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
The odometer and the outside
temperature indicator (if equipped)
use the same display. To switch the
display between them, press the
SEL/RESET button repeatedly.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, your last
selection is displayed.
Display Change Button Odometer Trip Meter
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
65
DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
±±
−−−−
−−−
−
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C in
Canadian models) warmer or cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
Select the outside temperature
display, then press the SEL/RESET
button for 10 seconds. The following
sequence will appear for 1 second
each:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4, 3, 2,
1,0(U.S.)or0,1,2,3, 3, 2,
1, 0 (Canada).
When it reaches the desired value,
release the SEL/RESET button. You
should see the new outside
temperature displayed.
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
SEL/RESET button until the
temperature is shown on the
information display.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
If equipped
Outside Temperature Indicator
Gauges
66
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount.
This shows the temperature of the
operation, the reading should rise to
severe driving conditions, such as
very hot weather or a long period of
uphill driving, the reading may rise
intotheupperhalfofthegauge.Ifit
reaches the red (Hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. See
page for instructions and
precautions on checking the engine
cooling system.
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
263
CONTINUED
Fuel Gauge Temperature Gauge Check Fuel Cap Message
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
67
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
about the middle of the gauge. In
engine coolant. During normal
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
266
211
Maintenance Minder
Gauges
68
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
1
2
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
69
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
PASSENGER’S AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 29)
(P. 115)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
HEADLIGHTS/ TURN SIGNALS
HORN
(P. 170)
HEATED MIRRORS
AUDIO SYSTEM
Vehicle without navigation system is shown.
(P. 72)
(P. 71)
(P. 70)
(P. 73)
(P. 102)
(P. 73)
(P. 105)
(P. 101)
TILT/
TELESCOPIC
ADJUSTMENT
REMOTE
AUDIO
CONTROLS
CRUISE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P. 175)
(P. 74)
1
2
2
2
2
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers operate every
few seconds. In low speed and high
speed, the wipers run continuously.
The wipers run at high speed.
The wipers run at low speed.
The length of the wiper interval is
varied automatically according to the
vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wipers change to
low speed when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20km/h).
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
OnEXandSimodelsinU.S.,andLX,
EXandSimodelsinCanada
MIST
OFF
INT
HI
LO
Windshield Washer
Windshield Wipers and Washers
70
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Turning the
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
Push the lever
forward until you hear a click. The
high beam indicator will come on
(see page ). Pull the lever back to
return to the low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the key
removed from the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder beeper
when you open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder.
Turn signal
Off
Parking and indicator lights
Headlights on
High beams
Flashhighbeams
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
62
Turn Signal
Headlights On
High Beams
Turn Signals and Headlights
Instruments and Controls
71
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋−
With the headlight switch off or in
the position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch. The buttons under the left side vent
control the brightness of the
instrument panel. Push the or
button to adjust the brightness.
Separate adjustments can be made
when the headlights are on and off.
There are six brightness levels.
When you push either button, the
information display indicates the
current level. You will hear a tone
when you reach the maximum or
minimum brightness. The display
returns to the odometer 5 seconds
after you stop adjusting the
brightness.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to the
or position.
The center of each meter (upper and
lower) illuminates with reduced
brightness when you unlock and
open the driver’s door, and then goes
back to the selected brightness when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness
Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
72
CONTROL BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page .
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side-
to-side.
Pushthebuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
101
OnCanadianLX,EXandSimodels
Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Instruments and Controls
73
Canadian LX, EX, Si
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Make any steering wheel
adjustments before you start driving.
Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
1.
4.
3.
2.
Steering Wheel Adjustments
74
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock . You can keep the trunk
and trunk release handle locked
when you leave your vehicle and the
valet key at a parking facility.
On DX model (except Canadian
DX-G), the passenger’s door can
also be locked or unlocked with
the key.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
CONTINUED
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
75
MASTER KEY WITH
REMOTE TRANSMITTER
MASTER KEY WITH
REMOTE TRANSMITTER
KEY NUMBER
TAG
U.S. EX and Si models
KEY NUMBER
TAG
VALET KEY
(Gray)
VALET KEY
(Gray)
KEY NUMBER
TAG
VALET KEY
(Gray)
MASTER KEYS (Black)
DX model (except Canadian DX-G)
All LX models and Canadian DX-G, EX,
and Si models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start your engine, contact your
dealer.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
On DX model (except Canadian DX-G)
Immobilizer System
Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
76
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in park.
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
CONTINUED
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
LOCK (0)
Ignition Switch
Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch
Instruments and Controls
77
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull out
the lock tab and close the door. To
lock the driver’s door, pull and hold
the outside door handle then pull out
the lock tab. Release the handle,
then close the door.
Each door can be locked or unlocked
with the ignition key.
Each door has a lock tab next to the
inside door handle. Pull out the tab
to lock the door, and push it in to
unlock.
When the door is unlocked, the red
mark on the lock tab is shown.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
On DX model except Canadian DX-G
Door Locks
Ignition Switch, Door Locks
78
LOCK
UNLOCK
LOCK TAB
RED MARK
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
leave the key in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
You will hear a reminder beep if you
t
u
rn off the beeper.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
a
l
l settings before you start driving.
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
lock switches are disabled. They are
not disabled if the driver’s door is
closed. Pushing the top of the switch
on the open passenger’s door will
lock both doors.
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull out
the lock tab and close the door. To
lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch and pull
out the lock tab or push the top of
the master switch, then close the
door.
To unlock only the driver’s door
from the outside, turn the key and
releaseit.Ifyouturnitagain,both
doors unlock.
The lock tab on the passenger’s door
locks and unlocks only that door.
Pushing in the driver’s door lock tab
only unlocks the driver’s door.
To lock the doors, push the top of
the master door lock switch on
either door, pull out the lock tab on
the driver’s door, or use the key in
the outside lock on the driver’s door.
Pushing the bottom of either master
door lock switch unlocks both doors.
If equipped
On LX, EX, and Si model in the U.S., and
DX-G,LX,EX,andSimodelsinCanada
Auto Door Locking/UnlockingPower Door Locks
Lockout Prevention
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
79
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors to
automatically lock and unlock. Make
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Door Locks
80
Auto Door Lock Modes
(Park Lock mode or Drive Lock mode)
and one mode for manual transmission
vehicles (Drive Lock mode). The
doors lock in Drive Lock mode. To
program modes, refer to the following
instructions.
In addition to normal locking
default setting from the factory is both
To program the Park Lock mode:
moved out of the Park (P) position
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to P, and close
the driver’s door.
Turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.
1.
2.
3.
Pushandholdthefront of the
ma
s
ter door lock switch on the
driver' s door. You will hear a
click. Keep holding the switch
until you hear another click (after
about 5 seconds).
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
4.
5.
Locks both doors when the shift lever is
automatic transmission vehicles
lock automatically in two modes for
functions, both doors can be set to
(automatic transmission vehicles only).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
81
reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Locks both doors when the vehicle's speed
Apply the parking brake.
On A/T vehicles, push and hold
the brake pedal, and move the
shift lever out of P.
1.
3.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and close the driver’s
door.
2.
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
On A/T vehicles,
move the shift
lever to the P position.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
5.
6.
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Push and hold the front of the
4.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Door Locks
82
Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver' s door until you hear a
click (after about 5 seconds).
Release the switch and, within
5 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
4.
5.
Apply the parking brake.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
On A/T vehicles, move the shift
lever to P.
1.
2.
3.
To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
83
set to unlock automatically in two
A
uto Door Unlock Modes
modes for automatic transmission
vehicles (Park Unlock mode or
Ignition Switch Unlock mode) and
one mode for manual transmission
vehicles (Ignition Switch Unlock
mode). The default setting from the
factory is the driver’s door unlocks in
Park Unlock mode (A/T) or Ignition
Switch Unlock mode (M/T). To
program modes, refer to the following
instructions.
The driver’s door or both doors can be
To program the Park Unlock mode:
When the shift lever is moved into the
Park (P) position (automatic
transmission vehicles only).
Unlocks the driver’s door or both doors
Move the shift lever to P, and close
the driver’s door.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Apply the parking brake.
1.
2.
3.
(after about 5 seconds) to activate
driver’s door unlock, or
(after about 10 seconds) to
activate all doors unlock.
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver' s door. You will hear a
click. Continue to hold the switch:
4.
5.
• Until you hear another click
• Until you hear two more clicks
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Door Locks
84
when the
ignition switch is moved out
of the ON (II) position.
To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or both doors
Apply the parking brake.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and close the driver’s
door.
1.
2.
On A/T vehicles, push and hold
the brake pedal, then move the
shift lever out of P.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’ s door. You will hear a
click. Continue to hold the switch:
• Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock, or
• Until you hear two more clicks
(after about 10 seconds) to
activate all doors unlock.
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
On A/T vehicles, move the shift
lever to P.
3.
4.
5.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
6.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Even though your vehicle’s battery is
removed or goes dead, the system
keeps the auto door lock/unlock
setting which you selected.
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
85
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
On A/T vehicles, move the shift
lever to P.
Apply the parking brake.
1.
2.
3.
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’ s door. You will hear a click
and, after about 5 seconds, you
will hear another click.
4.
5.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) and
the spotlights (if the switch is in the
Door position on EX and Si models)
will come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
either door within 30 seconds, the
lights fade out. If you relock the
doors with the remote transmitter
before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
lightsgoesoffimmediately.
If you do not open either door within
30 seconds, the doors automatically
relock, and the security system sets
(onU.S.LX,EX,andSimodels).You
cannot unlock it if the key is in the
ignition switch.
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the passenger’s door.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you push the button.
Press this button once to
lock both doors. Some exterior lights
will flash once. When you push
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you
doors are locked and that the
security system has set (on U.S. LX,
the doors if either door is not fully
closed or the key is in the ignition
switch.
U.S.:LX,EX,Si
Canada: DX-G, LX, EX, Si
UNLOCK
LOCK
Remote Transmitter
86
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LED
U.S. EX and Si models
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LED
U.S.: LX Canada: DX-G, LX, EX, Si
EX and Si models). You cannot lock
will hear a horn to verify that the
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
Press this
button for about 1 second to open
the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
if the key is in the ignition switch.
Pressthisbuttonfor
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Battery type: CR1616
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
1.
CONTINUED
OnU.S.EXandSimodels
Replacing the Transmitter
BatteryTRUNK RELEASE
PANIC
Remote Transmitter Care
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
87
SCREW
U.S. EX and Si models are shown.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the side facing down.
Install the parts in reverse order.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
4.
5.
2.
3.
Remote Transmitter
88
U.S. EX and Si models are shown.
BATTERY
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcanopenthetrunkintwoways:
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.
Pull the trunk release handle to
the left of the driver’s seat. To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
Usethemasterkeytoopenthe
trunk lock. The valet key does not
work in this lock.
50
CONTINUED
OnU.S.EXandSimodels
On all models except U.S. EX and Si
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
Trunk
Instruments and Controls
89
MASTER KEY
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
Pull
All models except U.S. EX and Si
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside. To open the trunk, push the
release lever to the left.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page .
To protect items in the trunk when
you need to give the key to someone
else:
Lock the trunk release handle
with the master key.
Give the person the valet key.
35
1.
2.
Emergency Trunk Opener
Trunk
90
MASTER KEY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
11 13
FrontSeatAdjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
91
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat bottom,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To get into the rear seat on the
driver’s side, open the door and pull
up on the seat-back adjustment lever.
The seat-back will tilt forward to
allow easier entry to the rear seat.
Make sure your passenger’s hands
orfingersareawayfromthearmrest
before moving it.
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to one of its three positions.
On all models except DX
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Armrest Rear Seat Access
Driver’s Side
Seats
92
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To get into the rear seat on the
passenger’s side, push downward on
the release lever at the base of the
seat-back or pull up on the seat-back
adjustment lever. The seat-back will
tilt forward to allow easier entry to
the rear seat.
When you push down the release
lever or pull up the adjustment lever,
the seat will also move forward.
After a passenger gets into the back
seat, push the seat-back to the
upright position, and push the seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
Except U.S. DX
Seats
Passenger’s Side
Instruments and Controls
93
RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
13
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
Theyaremosteffectivewhenyou
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust a
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, the
center head restraint should be
adjusted up or down, to match the
passenger’s height.
Head Restraints
Seats
94
RELEASE
BUTTON
RELEASE BUTTON
Rear Center PositionFRONT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The left and right halves can be
folded separately.
The back of the rear seat folds down
to give you direct access to the trunk.
The seat-back can be released from
inside the trunk.
Remove any items from the seat
beforeyoufolddowntheseat-back.
When storing cargo, you can move
therearcentershoulderbeltoutof
the way by removing the belt from
the guide.
To release the seat-back, pull the
release under the trunk panel. Push
the seat-back down, then let go of
the release.
For full rear fold-down seat models,
the release is located on the driver’s
side of the trunk.
For 60/40 split rear fold-down seat
models, a release is located on each
side of the trunk.
On all models except DX and U.S. LX
Folding Rear Seat
Seats
Instruments and Controls
95
GUIDE
RELEASE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seat-
back whenever it is in the upright
position.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
Make sure all items in the trunk, or
items extending through the opening
into the back seat, are secured.
Looseitemscanflyforwardand
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See on page
.
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See on
page .
Make sure that the folded-down rear
seat does not interfere with the front
passenger’s seat-back. This will
cause the front passenger’s weight
sensors to work improperly (see
page ). This may also cause the
seat belt reminder indicator for a
front passenger to work improperly.
Also, check the passenger airbag off
indicator to assure the proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.
25
188
50
Carrying Cargo
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Seats
96
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower either
window. To open the window, push
the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want the
window to stop. Pull back on the
switchandholdittoclosethe
window.
Thewindowsoperateforupto10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either door
cancels this function.
The driver’s armrest has a master
power window control panel. To
open the passenger’s window, push
down on the switch and hold it down
until the window reaches the desired
position. To close the window, pull
back on the window switch. Release
the switch when the window gets to
the position you want.
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
CONTINUED
AUTO
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
97
MAIN SWITCH
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is OFF, and the
passenger’s window cannot be raised
or lowered. To cancel this feature,
push on the switch again to get it to
pop out. Keep the MAIN switch off
whenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the window
unintentionally.
If the driver’s
window runs into any obstacle while
it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function could be disabled. If
the power window system needs to
be reset after reconnecting the
battery or installing the fuse, do this:
1.
2.
AUTO REVERSE
Power Windows
98
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid
back into the roof. Use the switch on
the front ceiling to operate the
moonroof. You must turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position to operate the moonroof.
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
To open the moonroof
fully, pull back the moonroof switch
firmly, then release it. The moonroof
automatically opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening,
push the switch briefly.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
To open or close the moonroof
partially, lightly pull the switch back
or push it forward and hold it. The
moonroof will stop when you release
the switch.
To open the moonroof, pull back on
the switch and hold it. Release the
switch when the moonroof reaches
the desired position. To close the
moonroof, push the switch forward
andholdit.Releasetheswitchto
stop the operation.
If equipped
CONTINUED
AUTO
Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
99
MOONROOF SWITCH
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If the
moonroof runs into any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it
will reverse direction and then stop.
To close the moonroof, remove the
obstacle, then use the moonroof
switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch. The
key-off delay cancels as soon as you
open either door.
AUTO REVERSE
Moonroof
100
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
1.
2.
3.
4.
If equipped
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
101
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page ).
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the rear window defogger
button. The indicator in the button
comesonasareminder.Pressthe
button again to turn the heaters and
the defogger off.
58
OnCanadianLX,EXandSimodels
Power Mirror Heaters Parking Brake
Mirrors, Parking Brake
102
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
103
VANITY MIRROR
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
COAT HOOK
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
:If equipped
BEVERAGE HOLDER
SUN VISOR
CENTER POCKET
SIDE POCKET
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET MAP POCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
Open the front beverage holder by
sliding the lid.
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.
To close, lower the lid, and push it
down until it latches.
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push.
If equipped
Beverage Holders Console Compartment Glove Box
Interior Convenience Items
104
LEVER
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
To use an accessory power socket,
pull up the cover.
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
To use a coat hook, pull it down.
Close it with a firm push.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
CONTINUED
Coat Hook Accessory Power Sockets
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
105
COAT HOOK
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.Another accessory power socket is in
the center console compartment.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When both sockets are
being used, the combined power
rating of the accessories should be
120 watts or less (10 amps).
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
OnEXandSimodels
Vanity Mirror Sun Visor
Interior Convenience Items
106
SUN VISOR
EX and Si
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After both doors are closed tightly,
the light dims slightly, then fades out
in about 30 seconds.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
If you leave either door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light goes off after 3 minutes.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
Open either door.
Unlock the doors with the key or
the remote transmitter.
Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
CONTINUED
On LX model
SpotlightsCeiling Light
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
107
DOOR ACTIVATED
ON
OFF
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The spotlights have a two-position
switch. In the DOOR position, the
lights come on when you open either
door. In the OFF position, the lights
do not come on.
The spotlights (with the switch in
the DOOR position) also come on
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter, and
when you remove the key from the
ignition switch.
The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, push the instrument
panel brightness control buttons
under the driver’s side vent.
OnEXandSimodels
OnEXandSimodels
Courtesy Light
Interior Lights
108
DOOR ACTIVATED
OFF POSITION
SPOTLIGHT
COURTESY LIGHT
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The heating and air conditioning
systems in your vehicle provide a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
Air conditioning is optional on DX
model.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them. (If you have an optional
audio system, refer to the operating
instructions that came with it.)
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 110
................................Audio System . 115
Audio System (Models without
...............navigation system) . 116
......Playing the AM/FM Radio . 117
Playing the XM
Satellite
...................Radio (Optional) . 121
............................Playing a Disc . 126
...Disc Player Error Messages . 132
Optional Disc Changer Error
...............................Messages . 133
Audio System (Models with
...............navigation system) . 134
...............Voice Control System . 134
......Playing the AM/FM Radio . 134
Playing the XM
Satellite
......................................Radio . 138
............................Playing a Disc . 146
...Disc Player Error Messages . 154
.....................Playing a PC Card . 155
............AM/FM Radio Reception . 167
..................Protecting Your Discs . 169
................Remote Audio Controls . 170
...Playing an Optional Audio Unit . 171
.................Radio Theft Protection . 172
..........................Setting the Clock . 173
............................Security System . 174
...............................Cruise Control . 175
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
Navigation systems are available on
U.S. EX and Si models only.
All models except U.S. DX
U.S.LX,EX,andSimodels
Features
Features
109
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
Vents, Heating, and A/C
110
MODE BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON/
HEATED MIRRORS
FAN CONTROL DIAL
If equipped
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DIAL
MAX A/C BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Turn this dial to increase or decrease
the fan speed and airflow.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicatorinthebuttonisonwhen
the A/C is on.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard. Pressing the or A/C
button cancels MAX A/C.
On some models, this button also
operates the heated outside mirrors
(see page ).
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
73
102
CONTINUED
If equipped
If equipped
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dial
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Rear Window Defogger ButtonRecirculation Button
MAX A/C Button
Mode Control
Features
111
Air flows from the floor
vents.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode from
or to , the system
keeps the A/C on. The A/C
indicator will not come on if it was
off to start with.
To turn off the A/C, press the A/C
button to illuminate the indicator,
then press it again to turn off the
A/C.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C turns off. But if
it was on to start with, the A/C stays
on.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
You cannot turn the A/C off in this
mode.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Select .
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode
from or , the system
also automatically turns on the
A/C. This helps prevent the
windows from fogging up
unintendedly. The A/C indicator
willnotcomeonifitwasoffto
start with (see the first column on
this page).
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Ventilation
Using the Heater
112
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select MAX A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects , and
switches to recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Turn the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
66
1.
2.
3.
If the interior is very warm,
Dehumidify the InteriorUsing the A/C
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
113
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was off to start with.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
When you switch to , from
or , the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button twice. The indicator in the
buttoncomesonandthengoesoff.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C indicator does not come
on if it was off to start with.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To Defog and Defrost To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Vents, Heating, and A/C
114
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
An audio system is standard on all
models except the U.S. DX. Read the
appropriate pages (as shown below)
to use your vehicle’s audio system.
For U.S. LX, non-navi EX and Si, and
all Canadian models, see pages
through .
For U.S. EX and Si models with
navigation system, see pages
through .
133
134 166
116
Audio System
Features
115
U.S. EX and Si models
without navigation system
U.S. EX and Si models
with navigation system
U.S. LX model
All Canadian models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your audio system shows a welcome
message on the display when you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. You can see a message
‘‘WELCOME’’ on the display when
your vehicle was new.
You can also customize this welcome
message to your liking with the
audio controls.
To change the letter, select the
previous segment by pushing the
bottom of the SEEK button.
Turn the TUNE knob to change a
letter.
Push the top of the SEEK button
to select the next segment, then
turn the TUNE knob to select a
letter. Repeat this procedure to set
your message.
Youcansetuptoabout16
characters on the display.
To select a character:
Make sure the audio system is off.
PushandholdtheTUNEknob,
then push the power/volume knob
on the audio control panel. You
will see the first letter blinking.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop selecting a letter.
2.
3.
4.1.
To Customize a Message
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
116
EX model is shown.
TUNE KNOB
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
SEEK BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
117
U.S. LX and all Canadian models
SCAN
BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
U.S. EX and Si models
AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
PRESET
BUTTONS
SEEK
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB SEEK
BUTTON
TUNE KNOBPRESET
BUTTONS
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button (the AM/FM button on
models with XM radio available).
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button (AM/FM button on
models that are XM radio capable).
On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob to the right to tune a
higher frequency, and turn it to the
left to tune a lower frequency.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
SEEK button, then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
To Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
SCANTo Play the AM/FM Radio
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
118
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−Each side of the buttons
(1 through 6) can store one
frequency on AM, and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each side of
the preset button.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset number (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. You will see
A. SEL flashing in the display, and
the system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
167
To turn off auto select
Preset AUTO SELECT
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
SUBWOOFER (if equipped), and
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation) settings.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
Adjusts the volume level
basedonthevehiclespeed.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control buttons to adjust
the illumination of the audio system
(see page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
72
If equipped
Adjusting the Sound
BASS
TREBLE
BALANCE
SUBWOOFER
FADER
SVC
Audio System Lighting
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
120
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM
Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM
is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
Playing the XM
Satellite Radio
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Optional on U.S. EX and Si models
Features
121
DISPLAY BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
XM RADIO BUTTONSCAN BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the ‘‘XM’’
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
Press either side of the CATEGORY
button ( or ) to select
another category.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
Channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
Operating the XM Radio
TUNE
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)
MODE
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
122
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using each side of
the preset button. Each side of the
button stores one channel from the
XM1 band and one channel from the
XM2 band.
To store a channel:
Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
Pick a preset number you want for
that channel. Press and hold the
button until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Press the XM button again. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper side of the preset
button to tune to it.1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
SCAN
Preset
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
The selected channel
number does not exist or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
124
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system and press the XM
RADIO button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Disc
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
126
TUNE KNOB
DISPLAY
BUTTON
U.S. LX model
All Canadian models
EJECT BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR
REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
DISPLAY
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR CD BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
U.S. EX and Si models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD/
AUX button (the CD button on
models with XM radio available).
You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the display.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 255
folders or tracks.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
intherestofthewaytoplayit.You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track and
the elapsed time are shown in the
display. When playing a disc in MP3
or WMA, the numbers of the current
folder and file, and the elapsed time
are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
CONTINUED
To Play a Disc
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To Load a Disc
Features
127
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＞
Use the SEEK/SKIP button while a
disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3/WMA
mode).
Each time you
press and release the side of
the SEEK/SKIP button, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release the
side to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
itagaintoskiptothebeginningof
the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the or side of the
SEEK/SKIP button.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
foldername,filename,etc.).Ifthe
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
Text Data Display Function
SEEK/SKIP
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
128
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
theknobtotherighttoskiptothe
next folder, and to the left to move to
the beginning of the current folder.
Turn it again to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
skips several folders at a time.
To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT button twice.
You will hear a beep and see F-RPT
in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button,
or selecting a different folder with
the TUNE knob also turns off the
repeat feature.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal playing.
This feature plays
the tracks within a disc (the files
within a folder in MP3 or WMA
mode) in random order. To activate
random play, press and release the
RDM button. In MP3 or WMA mode,
press the RDM button repeatedly to
select RDM (within a folder random
play). You will see RDM in the
display. Press the RDM button for 2
seconds to return to normal play.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in each folder in random order.
To activate folder random, press the
RDM button 2 times. You will hear a
beep and see F-RDM in the display.
The system will then select and play
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random by
pressing the RDM button again, or
by selecting a different folder with
the TUNE knob.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a folder random play),
then to normal playing.
CONTINUED
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER-REPEAT
RANDOM (Random within a
disc/folder)
FOLDER-RANDOM
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
129
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP button also turns off the scan
feature.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from folder scan to scan, then to
normal playing.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button
(the AM/FM button or XM button
on models that are XM radio
capable). Press the CD button again
to switch back to the disc player.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press the
SCAN button. In MP3 or WMA
mode, press the SCAN button
repeatedly to select SCAN. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a10secondsamplingofeachtrack/
file on the disc. Press the SCAN
button again to get out of scan mode
and play the last track/file sampled.
This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN button twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP button, selecting a different
folder with the TUNE knob, or
pressing the SCAN button, also turns
off the folder scan.
In MP3 or WMA mode
To Stop Playing a DiscSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
130
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−＋
−＋
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
Load the desired discs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the preset 4
(DISC ) or the preset 1 (DISC )
on the preset button. To select the
previous disc, press the preset 4
(DISC ), or the preset 1 (DISC )
to select the next disc in sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available disc to load and
play.
An optional six or eight disc changer
is available for your vehicle. This
disc changer uses the same controls
used for the in-dash disc player or
the radio. For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.169
Operating the Optional Disc
Changer
Protecting Discs
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
SolutionCauseError
Message
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
If there is still a problem, the error
message will appear again. Press the
eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Disc Player Error Messages
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
132
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Error
Message
SolutionCause
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
If there is still a problem, the error
message will appear again. Press the
eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Press the magazine eject button, and pull the
magazine out. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see your dealer.
Insert disc.
Press the magazine eject button, pull the
magazine out, check for an error message, then
insert the magazine again. If the message does
not disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulled
out, see your dealer.
Insert disc magazine.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
No disc in the disc
magazine
Mechanical Error
No disc magazine in the
disc changer
High Temperature
Optional Disc Changer Error
Messages
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In addition to the standard audio
controls, the audio system in your
vehicle can be operated using the
voice control system. See the
navigation section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
Voice Control System Playing the AM/FM Radio
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
134
TUNE BAR
AUTO SELECT
ICON
BACKGROUND
ICON
SOUND ICON
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
FM2 ICON
AM ICON
FM1 ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
▲▼
▲
▼
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Use the
control buttons on the left side of the
screen. The status bar appears on
the bottom of the screen each time
you operate any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see audio information
by touching the AUDIO INFO icon
on the lower of the screen.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button, or touch the desired band
icon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2).
On the FM band, STEREO will be
displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
For information on XM radio, see
page .
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
side to tune to a lower
frequency.
Press and hold the or side of
the TUNE bar until you hear two
beeps to change the frequency
rapidly. Release the bar when the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
138
CONTINUED
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station
TUNE
Features
135
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
▲▼
−
Each preset button’s frequency is
shown on the bottom of the audio
display.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
andplayitfor10seconds.Whenit
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press and hold the or side of
the TUNE bar until you hear a beep,
then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Preset
SEEK
SCAN
136
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the AUDIO button to view the
audio control icons, then press the
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO
SEL flashing in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
press the
AUTO SEL icon. This restores the
presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.167
To turn off auto select,
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
AUTO SELECT
Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
138
TUNE BAR
SCAN BUTTON
JOYSTICK
CATEGORY
INDICATOR
AUDIO BUTTON
XM RADIO
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
AM/FM BUTTON
PRESET CHANNEL
NUMBER
XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM
Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM
is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
Whenyoupressandholdthe
AUDIO button, the display also
shows all XM information.
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the CD/XM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
touch the MODE icon. In channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels. In category mode,
such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,
you can select all of the channels
within that category. Each time you
touch and release the MODE icon,
the display changes between the
channel mode and the category
mode.
You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
station, AM station, disc, pc card, etc.,
by touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display.
You can also operate the radio using
the control buttons on the left side of
the screen. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen each
time you press any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see the audio
information by touching the AUDIO
INFO icon on the lower of the screen.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Operating the XM Radio MODE
Features
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
▼
▲
Pick the preset button (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the button (icon) until you
hear a beep.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
To store a channel:
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using each preset
button or preset icons on the screen.
Each preset button or icon stores
one channel from the XM1 band and
one channel from the XM2 band.
Press the TUNE bar to
change channel selections. Press
for higher numbered channels
and for lower numbered
channels. In the category mode, you
can only select channels within that
category.
Press and hold
either side of the TUNE bar
( or ) until you hear a beep
to select another category.
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button or
touch the SCAN icon on the screen.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to listen
to, press the button or touch the icon
again.
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
1.
2.
3.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
PresetTUNE
CATEGORY
SCAN
140
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Press the XM button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button
(icon) to tune to it. Each preset
button’s channel is shown on the
bottom of the audio display.
The selected channel
number does not exist or is not part
of your subscription.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
This channel has no
artist or title information at this time.
4.
5.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
‘‘NO INFO’’
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
142
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE
bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system and press the XM
RADIO button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
143
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
You can adjust the sound on the
navigation screen. To adjust the
sound, push the AUDIO button, then
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUNDicononthedisplay.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound. To adjust the
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR
icon.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble. To
adjust the treble and bass, touch
or on each side of the
treble or bass adjustment bar. The
adjustment bar on the right lower
display shows you the current
setting.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the L or R icon.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker. To adjust the
sound strength, touch or
on each side of the adjustment
bar.
The right upper display shows you
the current setting of the sound
strength coming from each speaker.
The SVC mode
controls the volume based on vehicle
speed. The faster you go, the louder
the audio volume becomes. As you
slow down, the audio volume
decreases. Touch the appropriate
icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
mode.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound
FADER
BASS
TREBLE
BALANCE
SUBWOOFER
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation)
144
SOUND ICON
SPEAKER SETTING
BASS/TREBLE SETTING
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control buttons to adjust
the illumination of the audio system
(see page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
You can select the background
screen to display the sound level.
There are three screen modes: level
(the sound level is shown with the
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the
sound level appears as ripples of
water), and off. Each time you touch
the background icon, the display
changes.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
You can also select the icon with the
joystick. Move it up and down to
move the highlighting and scroll
through lists. Select the icon, then
move the joystick to left or right to
change the setting.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory. If you feel the
sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi. 72
Audio System Lighting
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Screen Mode
Features
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Playing a Disc
146
SCAN BUTTON
JOYSTICK
AUDIO BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
OPEN BUTTON
CD BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
CD ICON
TUNE BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
load or play discs, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/
256/320 kbps (MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/
64/80/96/112/128/160
kbps (MPEG2)
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
This audio system can also play CD-
RsandCD-RWscompressedinMP3
or WMA formats. When playing a
disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ on
the screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’
will appear on the screen. You can
select up to 99 folders and play up to
999 tracks. If the disc has a complex
structure, it takes a while to read the
disc before the system begins to play
it.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays CD FORMAT, and then
skips to the next file.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
CONTINUED
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
Features
147
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The disc player is behind the
navigation screen. To use the disc
player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the disc player appears.
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way and begin to
play it.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button on
the edge of the screen panel. Do not
use the folded screen as a tray. If
you put a cup, for example, on the
screen, the liquid inside the cup may
spill on the screen when you go over
a bump.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Load a Disc
148
OPEN BUTTON
DISC SLOT
CLOSE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the disc player.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD button. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
lower of the screen.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, the track, album, and artist
name are shown on the audio display.
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,
the folder number and name, the file
number and name, the artist name,
and the elapsed time are shown. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes. If the disc
was not recorded with text data, it
will not be displayed.
You can also select an icon with the
joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press the
ENT on the top of the joystick to
select the icon.
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
You can use the preset buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3 or
WMA mode). Each preset button’s
function is shown on the bottom of
the screen.
To move rapidly within
a track/file, press and hold
(preset 4) or (preset 3).
CONTINUED
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
FF/REW
Features
149
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
▲
▼
−
−
−
−To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the side of the TUNE bar to skip
to the next folder, and the side to
move to the beginning of the current
folder.Pressitagaintoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button
(preset 1). You will see TRACK
REPEAT in the display. Press and
hold the RPT button for 2 seconds to
turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press and hold the RPT
button (preset 1). You will see
FOLDER REPEAT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder. Press the RPT button
again to turn it off. Pressing the
RDM button or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE bar also turns
off folder repeat.
This
featureplaysthetrackswithinadisc
(the files within a folder) in random
order. To activate track random,
press and release the RDM button
(preset 2). You will see TRACK
RANDOM in the display. Press and
hold the RDM button for 2 seconds
to return to normal play.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in each folder in random order,
rather than in the order they are
compressed. To activate folder
random, press the RDM button
(preset 2) twice. You will see
FOLDER RANDOM in the display.
The system then selects and plays
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random by
pressing the RDM button again, or if
you select a different folder with the
TUNE bar.
In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
FOLDER SELECTION
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER REPEAT
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a disc/folder)
FOLDER RANDOM
150
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
CONTINUED
You can also select a track/file
directly from a track list on the audio
display. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display, then touch
the Track List icon. The track list
menu appears on the display.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6) also turns off scan.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order
they were recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see TRACK SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file on the
disc. Press and hold the SCAN
button for 2 seconds to get out of
scan mode and play the last track/
file sampled.
This feature,
when activated, samples all the first
files in each folder on the disc in
order. To activate folder scan, press
and hold the SCAN button. You will
see FOLDER SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in
each folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system then
plays the first file in each folder for
10 seconds each. After playing the
first file of the last folder, the system
goes to normal playing.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6), or selecting a different folder
with the TUNE bar, or pressing the
SCAN button, also turns off folder
scan.
In MP3 or WMA mode
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Using a Track List
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
FOLDER SCAN
Features
151
FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON
FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
To remove a disc from the audio unit,
fold back the screen by pressing the
OPEN button (see page ). Press
the disc eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, each track name is shown
in the audio display. With a disc
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder
number and the location are also
displayed.
You cannot close the screen if a disc
is partially inserted into its slot.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
If the disc was not recorded with text
data, only the track number is shown.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon on the
screen.
Select the desired track/file by
touching the icon on the display. The
selected icon will be highlighted in
blue. The system begins to play the
selected track/file. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon
on the upper left of the screen to
move to the parent folder. The
current folder is highlighted in blue.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or
XM2 icon. If a PC card is in the audio
unit, touch the CARD icon to play
the PC card. Press the CD button
again or touch the CD icon to switch
back to the disc player.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
148
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Removing a Disc
To Stop Playing a Disc
152
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Load the desired discs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD/AUX button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use either side of the
TUNE bar. To select the previous
disc, press the side. To select the
next disc, press the side.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available disc to load and
play.
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page .An optional six or eight disc changer
is available for your vehicle. This
disc changer uses the same controls
used for the in-dash disc player or
the radio.
169
Operating the Optional Disc
Changer
Protecting Discs
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
153
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Error
Message
Cause Solution
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
If there is still a problem, the error
message will appear again. Press the
eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
TOC Error
High Temperature
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Disc Player Error Messages
154
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
Playing a PC Card
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
155
OPEN BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
CD/XM BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
JOYSTICK
TUNE BAR
PLAY MODE
ICON
PC CARD ICONTRACK LIST ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
You operate the PC card player with
the same controls used for the radio
and the disc player. To load or play a
card, the ignition switch must be in
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
The PC card player reads and plays
cards in MP3 or WMA formats.
Depending on the format, the screen
will indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ when
a card is playing. The card limit of
the player is 99 folders and 999
tracks. If the card has a complex
structure, it takes some time for the
system to begin playing it.
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,
the recommended PC cards for the
PC card reader are:
Always use the recommended
memory card with the appropriate
adapter (if an adapter is needed).
Some memory cards will not work in
this unit.
When you insert a PC card into
the slot, make sure you put it in
straight. If you cannot insert it,
remove it, and insert again.
Do not keep PC cards in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage them.
To avoid damaging the card
reader, do not insert hard disc
drive cards into the PC card slot.
You cannot close the screen
(move it to the upright position)
until the PC card is inserted all the
way into its slot or removed.
Never insert foreign objects into
the PC card slot.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/
320 kbps (MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/
80/96/112/128/160 kbps
(MPEG2)
SD memory card
CompactFlash
Flash ATA
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Play a PC card
156
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
In WMA format, DRM (digital rights
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, it
skips that file and plays the next
available folder or file.
The PC card slot is behind the
navigation screen. To use the PC
card player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the PC card slot appears.
Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
The drive will read the PC card and
begin to play it.
Return the screen to the upright
position by pressing the CLOSE
button on the edge of the screen
panel.
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the PC card player.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press any
of the appropriate control buttons.
The status bar appears on the
bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
screen.
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48
kHz
Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/
192 kbps
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Loading a PC Card
Features
157
PC CARD SLOT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Therearethreeplaymodes:Folder,
Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the
modes by touching its icon. When a
mode is selected, it is highlighted in
blue.
If play mode information was not
includedinthetrackswhenthey
were added to the card, it will not be
displayed on the screen.
Foldermodeplaystracksinthe
order they were added to the card.
Artistmodeplaystracksin
alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
Album mode plays albums
(folders) in alphabetical order.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Select a Play Mode
158
FOLDER MODE
MODE INDICATOR
PLAY MODE ICON
PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON
MODE INDICATOR
MODE INDICATOR
ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To select a play mode, push the
AUDIO button to show the audio
display, then touch the PLAY MODE
icon on the display.
Select the desired mode by touching
the appropriate icon, or move the
joystick, then press the ENT.
After you select the play mode, the
display changes to the selectable
playing menu. If you select
‘‘Continue playing the Current Song,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode after playing the current
file.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
159
PLAY MODE ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode immediately and begins to
play the files in order to the new list.
To go back to the previous screen,
presstheCANCELbuttononthe
rightsideofthescreen.Toexitthe
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
button.
You can use the preset buttons while
a card is playing to select or change
files. Each preset button’s function is
shownonthebottomofthescreen.
Iconsonthescreencanalsobe
selected with the joystick. Move the
joystick left or right and up or down
until the icon is highlighted, then
press the ENT on the top of the
joystick to select the icon.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
160
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
▲
▼
−
−
−
−
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within
a file, press and hold (preset 4)
or (preset 3).
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the side of the TUNE bar to skip
the next folder, and to the side to
move the beginning of the current
folder.Pressitagaintoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
To continuously replay
a file, press and release the RPT
button (preset 1). You will see
TRACK REPEAT in the display.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off.
This feature, when
activated, replays all the files on the
selected folder/artist/album in the
order they are recorded or listed. To
activate each repeat mode, press and
hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2
seconds. You will see FOLDER
REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or
ALBUM REPEAT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder/artist/album. Press
andholdtheRPTbuttonfor2
seconds again to turn it off. Pressing
the RDM button, or selecting a
different folder/artist/album with
the TUNE bar also turns off the
repeat feature.
This feature
plays the files within a folder in
random order. To activate track
random, press and release the RDM
button (preset 2). You will see
TRACK RANDOM in the display.
Press and hold the RDM button for 2
seconds to return to normal play.
This feature, when
activated, plays all files in each
folder/artist/album in random order,
rather than in the order they are
recorded or listed. To activate each
random play, press the RDM button
(preset 2) 2 times. You will see
FOLDER RANDOM, ARTIST
RANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM in
the display.
CONTINUED
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
SKIP
FF/REW
FOLDER SELECTION
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
REPEAT
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a folder)
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
RANDOM
Features
161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
The system then selects and plays
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate each random play by
pressing the RDM button again, or
you select a different folder/artist/
album with the TUNE bar.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan
feature.
The scan function samples
all files on the PC card in the order
they are recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see TRACK SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each file on the PC card.
Press and hold the SCAN button for
2 seconds to get out of scan mode
and play the last file sampled.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder/artist/album on the PC
card in order. To activate each scan
feature, press and hold the SCAN
button until you hear a beep. You will
see FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCAN
or ALBUM SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system plays the first
file in each folder, in order, for 10
seconds each. After playing the first
file of the last folder/artist/album,
the system returns to normal play.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
folder/artist/album with the TUNE
bar, or pressing the SCAN button,
also turns off the scan feature.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
SCAN
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
SCAN
162
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
CONTINUED
You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon.
To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. In folder mode, touch the
folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the parent folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.
In artist mode, the artist name is also
displayed on the right side of each
selectable icon. Select the desired
file.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Using a Track List
Features
163
RETURN ICON
FOLDER ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
ARTIST NAME
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In album mode, the album name is
also displayed on the right side of
each selectable icon. Select the
desired file.
When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ from
the track list display, the song search
menu appears.
You can then select any of three
modes to search a file: Title by
Keyword, Artist, and Album.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Song Search Function
164
ARTIST ICON
TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON
RETURN ICON
SONG SEARCH ICON
ALBUM ICON
Folder mode is shown.
ALBUM NAME
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
Searching for a Song Title by Keyword Searching for a Song by Artist Name
In Title by Keyword mode, enter the
title name, or any keyword, by
touching the letter icons on the
screen. Press the List icon to begin
the song search. If you press the
CANCELbuttononthescreen,the
display returns to the mode menu
without doing a search.
To cancel the selected letter, select
the letter and touch the Delete icon.
To select more characters, touch the
More icon. The other character list
will be shown.
After the system searches for a song,
a file list is displayed. To scroll
through the list, touch the or
icon on the side of the screen. Select
the desired file by touching the
appropriate icon, or moving the
joystick and pressing the ENT.
Select the Artist icon, and the artist
list appears. Select the desired artist,
and the artist’s file list is displayed.
CONTINUED
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
165
MORE ICON
DELETE ICON
LIST ICON
FILE LIST
ARTIST LIST
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Searching for a Song by Album Name
Select the Album icon, and the
album list appears. Select the desired
album, and its song list is displayed.
You can then select the desired song
from the list.
To play the radio when a PC card is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or
XM2 icon. If a disc is in the audio
unit, press the CD button or touch
theCDicontoplaythedisc.Touch
the CARD icon to switch back to the
PC card player.
If you turn the system off while a PC
card is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the card will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the card will begin
playing where it left off.
When you leave the vehicle, always
remove the PC card from the audio
unit.
To remove a PC card from the audio
unit, fold back the screen by
pressing the OPEN button (see page
). Press the eject button ( )
to remove the card. If you do not
remove it from the slot, you cannot
return the screen to the upright
position.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You can also eject a card when the
ignition switch is off.
If there is a problem with the PC
card player, see your dealer.
148
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing a PC card
PC Card Player Malfunction
Removing a PC Card
166
ALBUM LIST
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
CONTINUED
Radio ReceptionRadio Frequencies
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
168
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the disc to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythe
system.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the system or the magazine.
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs
Features
169
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
＋
−
＋−
＋
−
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
disc (if a disc is loaded), or a PC card
(if it is loaded). On models with
satellite radio system, you can also
select XM radio.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press and release the
top ( ) of the button, the system
goes to the next preset station on the
band you are listening to. Press and
releasethebottom( )togobackto
the previous station.
To activate the seek function, press
and hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )
of the CH button until you hear a
beep. The system searches up or
down from the current frequency to
find a station with a strong signal.
Ifyouareplayingadisc,thesystem
skips to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA format)
each time you press the top ( ) of
the CH button. Press the bottom
( ) to return to the beginning of the
current track or file. Press it twice to
return to the previous track or file.
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).
If equipped
Remote Audio Controls
170
CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
−
＋
−
If you are playing a PC card, press
the top ( ) of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom( )togobacktothe
previous file.
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the seek function to select folders.
Press and hold the top ( ) of the
CH button until you hear a beep, to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom ( ) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
The auxiliary input jack is
underneath the accessory power
socket on the front panel. The
system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Remote Audio Controls, Playing an Optional Audio Unit
Features
171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific digit code using the
preset buttons (icon on vehicle’s with
navigation system). Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from specific
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
nexttimeyouturnonthesystem.
Use the preset buttons (icons on
vehicles with navigation system) to
enter the code. The code is on the
radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have 10 tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in 10 attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
U.S. LX, EX, Si and all Canadian models
Radio Theft Protection
172
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To set the time, press the CLOCK
(AM, AM/FM) button until the
displayed time begins to blink, then
release the button.
Change the hours by pressing the H
(preset 1) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(preset 2) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK (AM, AM/FM)
button again to enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing the
CLOCK (AM, AM/FM) button until
you hear a beep, then pressing the R
(preset 3) button sets the clock back
to the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the clock
sets forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
On models with navigation system
On models without navigation system
Setting the Clock
Features
173
MINUTE BUTTON
MINUTE BUTTON
HOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTON HOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTON
CLOCK BUTTON
CLOCK BUTTON
U.S. LX and all Canadian models U.S. EX and Si models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Once the security system is set,
opening either door without using
the key or the remote transmitter,
the hood, or the trunk will cause the
system to alarm. It also alarms if the
radio is removed from the dashboard
or the wiring is cut.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicleorremovetheradio.This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
indicator on the instrument panel
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the master key
(U.S. LX model) or the remote
transmitter (U.S. EX and Si models)
without triggering the alarm. The
alarm will sound if the trunk lock is
forced, or the trunk is opened with
thetrunkreleasehandleorthe
emergency trunk opener.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or either door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and trunk open
indicators on the instrument panel
(see page ), to see if the doors
and the trunk are fully closed. Since
it is not part of the monitor display,
manually check the hood.
Use the remote transmitter
to quickly check that the hood, the
trunk, and both doors are closed.
Push the lock button twice within 5
seconds. There should be an audible
confirmation beep.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
63
If equipped
Security System
174
NOTE:
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If equipped
CONTINUED
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
thecruisecontrol.Toresumetheset
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshifttoholdthesetspeed.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
1.
2.
3.
Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control
Features
175
CANCEL BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL
SET/DECEL
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle speeds up about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal causes the cruise
control to cancel.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel goes out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Push on the accelerator pedal until
you reach the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
176
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system remembers the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on, and the vehicle accelerates to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
Cruise Control
Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
Features
177
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 180
.................Fuel Recommendation . 180
.........Service Station Procedures . 181
....................................Refueling . 181
Opening and Closing
................................the Hood . 182
...................................Oil Check . 183
.............Engine Coolant Check . 185
...............................Fuel Economy . 185
...Accessories and Modifications . 186
.............................Carrying Cargo . 188
Before Driving
Before Driving
179
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane number of 91 or higher.
Useofaloweroctanegasolinecan
cause occasional metallic knocking
noises in the engine and will result in
decreased engine performance. Use
of a gasoline with a pump octane
number less than 87 can lead to
engine damage.
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
All models except Si
Si model only
180
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
You may hear a knocking noise from
the engine if you drive the vehicle at
low engine speed (below about 1,000
rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,
raise the engine speed by shifting to
a lower gear.
Open the fuel fill door by pushing
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
1.
2.
On Si model
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
Quick Start Guide
Before Driving
181
Push
TETHER
FUEL FILL CAP
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard. The
hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
maycomeon(seepage ).You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
1.
5.
6.
4.
3.
266
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
182
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
Pull the support rod out of its clip
by holding the grip, and insert the
end into the designated hole in the
hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly
to remove the support rod from
the hole. Put the support rod back
into its holding clip. Lower the
hood to about a foot (30 cm) above
the fender, then let it drop. Make
sure it is securely latched.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Insert it all the way back in its tube.
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
3.
1.
2.
3.2.
CONTINUED
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Before Driving
183
DIPSTICK
CLIP
LATCH
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
GRIP
SUPPORT ROD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
4.
222
Service Station Procedures
Adding Engine Oil
184
LOWER MARK
UPPER MARK
Si
Si
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
minder displayed in the
information display. See
on page
.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
216
226
216
For example,
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Engine Coolant Check Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy
Before Driving
185
RESERVE TANK
Si
RESERVE TANKMAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle, or improve its performance.
These accessories have been
designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Everytimeyouslowdownand
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.Usethefresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Fuel Economy, Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
186
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Non-Honda wheels can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
268
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
187
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Door and seat-back pockets
Glove box
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Trunk, including the rear seats
when folded down
Center pocket
Console compartment
Carrying Cargo
188
TRUNK
GLOVE BOX
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
DOOR POCKET
SEAT-BACK POCKET
: If equipped
CENTER
POCKET
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−×
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit:
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850
lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.
[The placard is on the driver’s
doorjamb.]
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. models
and 395 kg for Canadian models.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories.
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories
and cargo must not exceed the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) or the
gross axle weight rating (GAWR).
Bothareonalabelonthedriver’s
doorjamb.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 lbs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
Before Driving
189
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the proper operation of the
seats, or proper operation of the
sensors under the seats.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
Ifyoufolddownthebackseat,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.
50
Optional
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Cargo Net
190
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, and the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
.......................Driving Guidelines . 192
........................Preparing to Drive . 193
.......................Starting the Engine . 194
...................Manual Transmission . 195
..............Automatic Transmission . 198
...........................................Parking . 202
.............................Braking System . 203
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 204
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
........................................System . 206
...........................Towing a Trailer . 208
Driving
Driving
191
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Because of the low-profile tires
fitted to your vehicle, the alloy
wheels are closer to the ground.
Driving over a pothole or road
debris at too high a speed can
seriously damage a wheel. Slow
down under these conditions.
Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your vehicle. The front or rear
bumper may scrape when trying to
drive onto an incline, such as a
steep driveway or trailer ramps.
Use caution if you ever drive your
vehicleonveryroughorrutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ can
also cause damage.
Your vehicle is designed to give you
optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your vehicle has a
minimum of ground clearance and
very low-profile tires.
Driving Guidelines
Si model
192
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check that the trunk is fully
closed.
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page ).
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page ).
1.
2.
14
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
10.
55
91
101
243
74
Preparing to Drive
Driving
193
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
Press the clutch pedal down all the
way. The START (III) position
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission:
76
Starting theEngine
194
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page .
CONTINUED
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse.
On vehicles with 6-speed manual
transmission, the lockout system
prevents you from shifting directly
from any forward gear to reverse
while the vehicle is moving at a
certain speed (see page ).
When shifting up or down, make
sure you push the clutch pedal down
all the way, shift to the next gear,
and let the pedal up gradually. When
you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can
cause your clutch to wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift
into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
197
The engine can be damaged if
you inadvertently downshift into the
wrong gear (for example, going from
third gear at high rpms to second gear
instead of upshifting to fourth gear; the
engine speed limiter will not work in this
situation).
On Si model
Manual Transmission
Driving
195
Note:
SiDX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone in
the lower gear.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
aluminum shift lever. If you leave the
vehicle parked outside for a long
time on a hot day, be careful before
moving the shift lever. Because of
the heat, the shift lever may be
extremely hot. If the outside
temperature is low, the shift lever
feels cold.
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
27 mph (43 km/h)
39 mph (63 km/h)
53 mph (85 km/h)
Normal acceleration
17 mph (27 km/h)
29 mph (47 km/h)
37 mph (60 km/h)
43 mph (69 km/h)
49 mph (79 km/h)
With 5-speed manual transmission
With 6-speed manual transmission
On Si model
Recommended Shif t Points
Manual Transmission
196
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
Your vehicle has a rev limit indicator
to show you when the engine speed
is near the tachometer’s red zone
(see page ).
If you are still unable to shift to
reverse, apply the parking brake,
and turn the ignition key to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
With the clutch pedal still pressed,
start the engine.
Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
reverse.
If you need to use this procedure to
shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
The manual transmission has
lockout so you cannot accidentally
shift from any forward gear to
reverse while the vehicle is moving
at a certain speed. If you cannot shift
to reverse when the vehicle is
stopped, do the following.
With the clutch pedal pressed,
move the shift lever to the first/
second gear side of the neutral
gate, then shift to reverse.
1.
2.
3.
4.
64
On Si model
6-speed manual transmission
Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout
Manual Transmission
Driving
197
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal and
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever, then pull the lever.
YoucannotshiftoutofParkwhen
the ignition switch is in the LOCK
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
198
RELEASE
BUTTON
SHIFT LEVER
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the front of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
completestop,andthenshift.Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
buttononthefrontoftheshiftlever
to move it.
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
201
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
3
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R)
Park (P)
Neutral (N)
Drive (D)
Driving
199
−
−
−This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected. Use D to provide
engine braking when going down a
steep hill. D can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
To shift to second,
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
front of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D , and D, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Engine Speed LimiterDrive (D )
Second (2)
First (1)
3
200
Do this if pushing on the brake pedal
and pressing the release button does
not shift the transmission out of
Park:
Set the parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Using a
small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the edge of the cover to remove
it.
Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the lever out
of Park to neutral.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then install the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the rear.
Return the key to the ignition
switch, press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Driving
201
COVER
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
RELEASE BUTTON
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Lock the doors.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Turn off the lights.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
On vehicles with security system
Parking Tips
Parking
202
Never install a sunshade between the
upper and lower meters on the
instrument panel. If you do, you could
cause heat damage to the upper meter
on a very hot day.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness.
It also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Your vehicle is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels may be disc or drum,
depending on the model. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Braking System Design
Brake Wear Indicators
Braking System
Driving
203
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helpspreventthewheelsfrom
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to-
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page .267
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
204
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
267
On vehicles with VSA system
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
Driving
205
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some unusual noise from the
modulator. You will also see the VSA
activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA Activation indicator blinks.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible (see page ).
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
61
On Si model
VSA Activation Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
206
This switch is under the left vent.
Press it to turn the VSA system on
and off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
248
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving
207
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
trailer; attempting to do so can void
your warranties.
Towing a Trailer
208
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, a
maintenance record, and instructions
for simple maintenance tasks you
may want to take care of yourself.
......................Maintenance Safety . 210
....................Maintenance Minder . 211
....................Maintenance Record . 218
..............................Fluid Locations . 220
........................Adding Engine Oil . 222
.......Recommended Engine Oil . 222
..............................Synthetic Oil . 223
................Engine Oil Additives . 223
.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 224
..............................Engine Coolant . 226
....................Windshield Washers . 229
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 230
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 231
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 232
....................Power Steering Fluid . 233
.............................................Lights . 234
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 239
.....................................Floor Mats . 240
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 241
.................................Wiper Blades . 241
...............................................Tires . 243
...................Checking the Battery . 250
.............................Vehicle Storage . 252
295
Maintenance
Maintenance
209
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Injury from moving parts.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
210
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
15 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
15 %
5%
0%
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and
indicated maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
The remaining engine oil life is
displayed on the information display
according to this table:
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, then push and release
the SEL/RESET button repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator
appears (see page ).64
1: DX and Canadian DX-G
2: LX, EX, and Si
1
1
2
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Indicator
Maintenance
211
MAINTENANCE
MINDER INDICATOR
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
INFORMATION DISPLAY
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicator reminds you that the time
is coming soon to take your vehicle
in for the required maintenance.
Maintenance Minder
212
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE(S)
SERVICE MESSAGE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative mileage is
displayed and begins to blink after
the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
(10 km) or more.
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
( ) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
You can switch the display to the
odometer, the trip meter, and the
outside temperature indicator (if
equipped) by pushing the SEL/
RESET button on the dashboard
repeatedly.
Whentheengineoillifeis15to1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator ( ) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
217
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
213
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly until the engine oil life
indicator is displayed.
All maintenance items displayed in
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
You can change the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer, the trip
meter, or the outside temperature (if
equipped) every time you press and
release the SEL/RESET button.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
( )remainsonevenifyou
change the information display.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on the
following.
1.
2.219
Maintenance Minder
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
214
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEM
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
Press the SEL/RESET button for
more than 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
Press the SEL/RESET button for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
4.3.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
Maintenance
215
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
＃
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
183
230
185
232
243
234
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
216
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＃
＃
＊
＃
Maintenance Minder
217
:
If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column
on page .
Independent of the maintenance minder indicator in the information
display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
NOTE:
214
:
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and line (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
A
B
Symbol Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
Maintenance Minder
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
218
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
219
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, and EX models
220
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
Si model
Maintenance
221
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Light gray cap)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
222
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Si
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API certification seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is
preferred for improved fuel economy
and year-round protection in your
vehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil if
the temperature in your area never
goes below 20°F ( 7°C).
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle, to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Si model:
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, and EX
models:
Adding Engine Oil
Maintenance
223
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Temperature
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
1. 2.
Changing the Oil and Filter
224
DRAIN BOLTWASHER
DRAIN BOLT
WASHER
Si
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3. 4.
Si
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
CONTINUED
Changing the Oil and Filter
Maintenance
225
OIL FILTER
Si
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
3.9 US qt (3.7 )
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.6 US qt (4.4
)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
9.
Changing the Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
226
Si
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
227
RADIATOR CAP
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Engine Coolant
228
RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK
Si
RESERVE TANK
Si
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page ).
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
62
On Canadian models:
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
229
Si
LEVEL GAUGE
LEVEL GAUGE
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 by
your dealer as soon as it is
convenient.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator fan comes on, then
shut off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds
before going to step 2, but don’t
wait longer than 90 seconds.
Remove the dipstick, and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3.
4.
1.
2.
5.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
230
DIPSTICK
LOWER
MARK
UPPER
MARK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt, and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall
the filler bolt, and tighten it securely.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The automatic transmission should
be drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
6.
CONTINUED
Manual Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Manual Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
231
FILLER BOLT
Correct Level
Si
FILLER BOLT
Correct Level
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
The manual transmission should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Replace the brake fluid according to
thetimerecommendationsinthe
maintenance minder schedule.
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
Brake SystemBrake and Clutch Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
232
MAX
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
Manual Transmission only
All models except Si
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering FluidClutch Fluid
Maintenance
233
MAX
MIN
LOWER LEVEL
UPPER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to full left
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustment should be done by your
dealer or other qualified mechanic.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Open the hood.
To change a bulb on the driver’s
side, remove the coolant tube from
the two clips, then remove the
reserve tank from its holder by
pulling it straight up.
1.
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
High Beam Headlight
234
COOLANT
TUBE
CLIP
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
(Driver’s side)
Put the tube back in the clips and
install the reserve tank back in
place, making sure its bottom tab
is in the holder.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
235
TAB
BULB
CONNECTOR
HOLDER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To change the driver’s side bulb,
start the engine, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the right, and
turn off the engine. To change the
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw from the inner
fender, and pull the inner fender
cover back.
Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the screw and
tighten it securely.
2.1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lights
Low Beam Headlight
236
SCREW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the bulb from the socket
by pushing the bulb in and turning
it counterclockwise until it unlocks.
Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
To change the driver’s side bulb,
start the engine, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the right, and
turn off the engine. To change the
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw from the inner
fender, and pull the inner fender
cover back.
Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the screw and
tighten it securely.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.
2.1.
Lights
Replacing the Front Side Marker/
Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb
Maintenance
237
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the trunk.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Remove the screw in the center of
the fastener on the side of the
trunk lining. Pull the lining back.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the trunk lining. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk seal.
Put the fastener into the hole on
the side of the trunk lining.
Reinstall the screw.
Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/tail-light, back-
up light, side marker light, or turn
signal light.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
Lights
238
FASTENER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Open the trunk, then remove the
holding clips from the cover, and
remove the cover.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket. Turn it
clockwise until it locks. Make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the cover, and tighten its
holding clips securely.
2.
1.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
On DX and LX models
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Cleaning the Seat Belts
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Maintenance
239
SOCKET
BULB
LOOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If equipped
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
canbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mat.
Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
240
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system.
To replace a wiper blade:
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomeslessthanusual.
Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
1.
CONTINUED
On models with A/C
Wiper BladesDust and Pollen Filter
Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
Maintenance
241
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Slidethebladeoutoftheholder.Pull up the cover release tab on
the end of the blade assembly,
then remove the cover.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the release button. Then slide the
blade assembly out of the wiper
arm.
2. 3. 4.
Wiper Blades
242
BLADE
HOLDER
RELEASE BUTTON
COVER
RELEASE TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Align the slots in the new blade
with the retaining edges on the
holder, then slide the blade onto
the holder. Keep about 1 inch of
the holder extended from the
blade assembly so you can
reinstall the cover.
Reinstall the cover onto the blade
assembly.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
5.
6.
7.
8.
CONTINUED
Inflation GuidelinesTires
Wiper Blades, Tires
Maintenance
243
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressuresonthispage.
The following charts show the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear
Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear
Tire Size
DX and Canadian DX-G
LX, EX
Si
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
244
P195/65R15 89H 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2
kgf/cm
)
P215/45R17 87V 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2
kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2
kgf/cm
)
P205/55R16 89H
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
We strongly recommend that you do
not drive faster than the posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you ever drive in a sanctioned
competitive event at sustained high
speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),
be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressuresasshownbelow.Ifyoudo
not, excessive heat can build up and
cause sudden tire failure.
282
Front/Rear:
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Optional Summer for Si
Si model only
Si model only
Tires
High Speed Driving
Tire Inspection
Tire Size·Cold Tire Pressure for
High Speed Driving
Maintenance
245
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2
kgf/cm
)
215/45ZR17 91W
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
P215/45R17 87V
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated. If
you purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
As a trade-off, they will wear more
rapidly than tires used on ordinary
passenger vehicles. Because of the
vehicle’s weight distribution, and the
fact that the front wheels are the
driving wheels, you can expect them
to wear more rapidly than the rear
tires.
The tires that came on your vehicle
were designed and constructed to
provide superior grip during
acceleration, braking, and cornering.
For vehicles equipped with aluminum
wheels:
On Si model only
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Tire Wear
Tires
246
Front
Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s wheels. Use only Honda
wheel weights for balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Themileageyoucanexpectfrom
yourvehicletiresisthesameas
comparable mid-and rear-engine
sports cars, and it will vary greatly
with your driving habits.
If you drive moderately, the front
tires could last more than 10,000
miles (16,000 km). However, the
mileage will be substantially less if
you tend to drive your vehicle at the
upper limits of its capabilities.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure the new one matches the
specifications of the original.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
You should carefully inspect your
vehicle’s tires for wear, damage, and
proper inflation every 7,500 miles
(12,000 km).
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS to work inconsistently.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
Maintenance
247
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
for tire size and labeling
information.
DX and Canadian DX-G
LX, EX
Si
DX and Canadian DX-G
LX, EX
Si
282
284
Tires
Winter DrivingWheel and Tire Specifications
Snow Tires
248
15x6J
16x61/2J
17x7J
P195/65R15 89H
P205/55R16 89H
P215/45R17 87V
215/45ZR17 91W
(all season tire)
(summer tire)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices, with
rubber chain tensioners, on the front
tires. Use traction devices only when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires. Metal link-
type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
Si model
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, and EX models
Tires
Tire Chains
Maintenance
249
CH2311T
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
Checking the Battery
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
250
Si
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
On vehicles with navigation system
The navigation system will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradio,you
may see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset buttons to
enter the code (see page ).
172
Checking the Battery
Maintenance
251
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Disconnect the battery.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
Vehicle Storage
252
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 254
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 255
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 259
................................Jump Starting . 261
..............If the Engine Overheats . 263
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 265
..........Charging System Indicator . 265
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 266
...............Brake System Indicator . 267
..............................................Fuses . 268
..............................Fuse Locations . 272
......................Emergency Towing . 274
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
253
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Do not mount tire chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use a compact spare tire
mounted on a front wheel; it will
damage the limited slip differential
(see page ).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Follow these precautions:
255
On Si model
Compact Spare Tire
254
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.
Thesizedifferencemayalsocause
damage to the differential, so do not
mount the compact spare on the
front. If either front tire goes flat,
removethereartireonthatsame
side, mount the compact spare tire
on the rear, then mount the rear tire
on the front.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
floor by lifting up on the back edge.
Unscrew the wing bolt, and take
the spare tire out of its well.
Take the tool kit case out of the
trunk.
Thecompactsparetireissmaller
than a standard tire, and it will affect
the vehicle’s handling. Drive
cautiously when the spare is
mounted on your vehicle.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
On Si model only
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
255
SPARE TIRETRUNK FLOOR
JACK TOOL CASE
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
6. 7. 8.
9.
Changing a Flat Tire
256
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
JACKING POINTS
EXTENSIONWHEEL NUT WRENCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver
or other tool. The wheel cover
cannot be removed without first
removing the wheel nuts.
11.10.
12.
DX, Canadian DX-G and U.S. LX
models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
257
WHEEL NUTS WHEEL COVER
BRAKE HUB
WHEEL NUTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
14.
15.
13.
16.
17.
OnEXandSimodelsintheU.S.,and
LX, EX and Si models in Canada
Changing a Flat Tire
258
WING BOLTSPACER CONE
For
compact
spare tire
For normal
tire
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
sss
ttt
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Store the jack and tools in the tool
kit case. Place the tool kit case in
the center of the flat tire.
Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does
not get scratched or damaged.
Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
18.
19.
20.
261
CONTINUED
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
If the Engine Won’t Start
Jump Starting
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
259
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
).
194
274
250
261
76
268
274
Emergency
Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency Towing
IftheEngineWon’tStart
260
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
You cannot start your vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
To jump start your vehicle:
Turn off all the electrical
accessories: heater, A/C, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in neutral (M/T) or
Park (A/T), and set the parking
brake.
The numbers in the illustrations
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
261
BOOSTER BATTERY
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−＋
＋
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery.
6.4.
5.
3.
Jump Starting
262
Si Si
BOOSTER BATTERY
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
If the vehicle overheats, you
should take immediate action. The
only indication may be the
temperature gauge climbing to or
above the red mark. Or you may
see steam or spray coming from
under the hood.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
The reading of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
7.
1.
2.
Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats
If the Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
263
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
reading at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). Add coolant if the level is
below the MIN mark.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the reading
reaches the middle of the
temperature gauge or lower
before checking the radiator.
7.
8.
9.3.
4.
5.
6.
185
10.
11.274
274
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
264
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
1.
2.
3.
4.
183
222
274
Charging System IndicatorLow Oil Pressure Indicator
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
265
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the malfunction
indicator lamp may also come on
with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It can take several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to
for more
information (see page ).
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on
the information display. Tighten the
cap until it clicks at least once.
Tightening the cap will not turn the
indicator off immediately; it can take
several days of normal driving.
288
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Readiness Codes
State
Emissions Testing
266
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
If the ABS indicator comes on with
the brake system indicator, have
your vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position and as a reminder to
check the parking brake. It will stay
on if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
232
274
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
267
Canada
U.S.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
two fuse boxes.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages and , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
The interior fuse box is on the
driver’s lower left side.
The under-hood fuse box is in the
engine compartment on the driver’s
side, next to the brake fluid reservoir.
To open it, push the tabs as shown.
272 273
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
268
UNDER-HOOD
INTERIOR
TAB
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
sss
ttt
CONTINUED
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
pullerprovidedonthebackofthe
under-hood fuse box cover.
4.3.1.
2.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
269
FUSE BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
FUSE BLOWN
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
sss
ttt
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
6.
5.
Fuses
270
BLOWN
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper rating
for the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
sss
ttt
Your vehicle has spare fuses on
the back of the under-hood fuse
box cover.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page ).
If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. You
should reset the AUTO feature, (see
page ).
When the audio system is disabled,
the clock setting in the audio system
will be canceled. You will need to
reset the clock (see page ).
3.
97
172
173
All models except DX
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
271
FUSE PULLER
SPARE FUSES
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
sss
ttt
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
Amps.No. Circuits Protected
Circuits ProtectedAmps.No.
100 A
70 A
80 A
50 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
50 A
40 A
1
2
3
4
Main Fuse
EPS
Option
Ignition Switch Main
ABS/VSA Motor
ABS/VSA F/S
Headlight Main
Power Window Main
Not Used
Fan Motor
Main Fan Motor (A/T)
Main Fan Motor (M/T)
Rear Defroster
Blower
Hazard
FI
Stop, Horn
Not Used
Not Used
Oil Level Sensor
Not Used
Audio Amp
Ignition Coil
FI Main
MG Clutch
DBW
Interior Light
Back Up
20 A
30 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
:Simodel
Fuse Locations
272
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
sss
ttt
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No. Amps. No. Amps. Circuits Protected
Amps.No. Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
ODS (Occupant Detection
System)
Meter
SRS
Right Headlight High Beam
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Lights (Interior)
Small Lights (Exterior)
Right Headlight Low Beam
10 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Left Headlight Low Beam
Headlight High Beam Main
Small Lights Main
Not Used
Headlight Low Beam Main
Not Used
Not Used
Moonroof
Door Lock
Driver’s Power Window
HAC Option
Rear Accessory Socket
Accessory
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Accessory, Radio
IG2 HAC
Daytime Running Lights
Front Wiper
Power Window
Fuel Pump
IG1 ACG
ABS/VSA
Audio Amp
Front Fog Lights
Not Used
Not Used
: On models equipped
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
sss
ttt
−
−
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
Therearetwowaystotowyour
vehicle:
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on
the ground.
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to neutral.
Turn off the engine.
ShifttoD,thentoN.
Start the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Do not tie down the vehicle at an
angle that would allow the towing
cables to contact the vehicle’s front
bumper. To avoid possible damage,
protect the front bumper with tape.
With the front wheels on the ground,
do not tow the vehicle more than 50
miles (80 km), and keep the speed
below35mph(55km/h).
If your vehicle is equipped with a
front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission:
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lift Equipment
This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
This is an acceptable
way to tow your vehicle.
Emergency Towing
274
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shift the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
front wheels off the ground.
Main Menu
Main Menu
s
t
Table of Contents
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin
towing.
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 278
................................Specifications . 280
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 282
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 282
.................................Treadwear . 282
......................................Traction . 283
.............................Temperature . 283
.................................Tire Labeling . 284
.......................Emissions Controls . 285
.....................The Clean Air Act . 285
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 285
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 285
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 285
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 286
....................PGM-FI System . 286
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 286
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
....................(EGR)System . 286
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 286
....................Replacement Parts . 286
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 287
..............State Emissions Testing . 288
Technical Information
Technical Information
277
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
To access the VIN in the engine
compartment, slide the lid on the
back of the engine compartment.
Make sure to close the lid before
closing the hood.
Identification Numbers
278
CERTIFICATION LABEL
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
LID
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
sss
t
tt
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
279
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
Si
ENGINE NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, and EX
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
sss
ttt
＊＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
280
Dimensions
Weights
Engine
Capacities
174.8 in (4,440 mm)
68.9 in (1,751 mm)
53.5 in (1,358 mm)
104.3 in (2,650 mm)
59.0 in (1,499 mm)
60.1 in (1,526 mm)
3.19 x 3.44 in (81.0 x 87.3 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC , DOHC i-VTEC
4-cylinder gasoline engine
10.5
110 cu-in (1,799 cm
)
3.39x3.39in(86x86mm)
122 cu-in (1,998 cm )
SK22PR-M11S
IFR7G-11KS
SKJ20DR-M11S
IZFR6K-11SNGK:
DENSO:
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Spark plugs
13.2 US gal (50
)
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in
the engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.11 US gal (0.4
)
4.8 US qt (4.5
)
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
2.5 US qt (2.4
)
6.2 US qt (5.9
)
1.8 US qt (1.7
)
1.7 US qt (1.6
)
1.6 US qt (1.5
)
1.5 US qt (1.4
)
5.8 US qt (5.5
)
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
3.7 US qt (3.5
)
4.6 US qt (4.4
)
3.9 US qt (3.7
)
1.19 US gal (4.5
)
1.37 US gal (5.2
)
1.45 US gal (5.5
)
1.88 US gal (7.1
)
1.72 US gal (6.5
)
1.80 US gal (6.8 )
11.0
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Front
Rear
Approx.
Si
NGK:
DENSO:
1:
2:
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Si
U.S.: DX, LX, EX Canada: DX, DX-G, LX, EX
1:
2:
3:
4:
A/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada
Vehicles
12
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
3
4
3
3
4
1
2
Manual trans-
mission fluid
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
sss
ttt
−−
−
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Inf ormation
281
Air Conditioning
Lights
Battery
Fuses
Alignment
Tires
HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)
12 V
12 V
60 W
12 V
51 W
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant oil type
28/8 W
SP-10
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
21/5 W12 V
21 W12 V
12 V
12 V 5 W
8W
3CP
21 W
18 W
Headlights (HI)
Headlights (LO)
Front turn signal/Side marker/
Parking light
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Rear side marker lights
Back-up lights
High-mount brake light
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Trunk light
Capacity 36 AH/5 HR
Interior
Under-hood
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
1°30’
7°
P195/65R15 89H
12 V 3 CP
12 V
P205/55R16 89H
P215/45R17 87V
12 V
12 V
47 AH/20 HR
45 AH/20 HR
T135/80R16 101M
T125/70D15 95M
Size
Pressure
12 V 38 AH/5 HR
215/45ZR17 91W8W
See page 273 or the fuse label
attached to the dashboard.
See page 272 or the fuse box
cover.
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
(HB3)
(HB4)
1 : U.S.: DX, LX, EX
2 : Canada: DX, DX-G,LX, EX
3:Si
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
U.S. DX, Canada DX, DX-G
LX,EX
Si (all season tires)
U.S.: DX, LX, EX, Canada: DX, DX-G, LX, EX
Optional for Si (summer tires)
Si
: All models except EX and Si
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
1
2
1
3
1
2
3
5
4
6
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
sss
ttt
−The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
282
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
s
ss
t
tt
−
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Temperature A,B,C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
283
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
s
ss
t
tt
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
Max Press The maximum air
pressurethetirecanhold.
Max Load The maximum load the
tire can carry at maximum air
pressure.
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example
TIN. TIN is located on the sidewall
of the tire.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
B97R
FW6X
2202
DOT
R
P
H
205
55
16
89
Tire Size
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
Tire Identification Number
Tire Labeling
284
P205/55R16 89H
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
s
ss
t
tt
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
285
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
s
ss
t
tt
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust emissions controls
include three or four systems: PGM-
FI, ignition timing control, exhaust
gas recirculation (DX, LX, and EX),
and three way catalytic converter.
These systems work together to
control the engine’s combustion and
minimize the amount of HC, CO, and
NOx that comes out the tailpipe. The
exhaust emissions control systems
are separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
2
2
On DX, LX and EX models
Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls
PGM-FI System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Ignition Timing Control System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
286
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
Table of Contents
s
ss
t
tt
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
287
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Si modelDX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main MenuMain MenuMain MenuMain Menu
s
s
s
t
t
t
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Drive your vehicle for 30 seconds
while accelerating.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm,andholditthereuntilthe
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(about3minutes).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Testing of Readiness Codes
State Emissions Testing
288
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use
thecruisecontrol.Whentraffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
289
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Customer Service
................................Information . 292
....................Warranty Coverages . 293
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 294
.....................Authorized Manuals . 295
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
291
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Vehicle identification number (see
page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and
telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
278
Customer Service Information
292
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
this warranty gives up
to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Please refer to the 2007 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2007 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
293
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
294
http://www.safercar.gov
http://www.safercar.gov
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
７
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
(credit card orders only)
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
Authorized Manuals
295
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Price
Each
$75.00
$50.00
$44.00
$35.00
$29.00
$12.00
$12.00
FREE
Publication
Form Number
61SNA03
61SNA00EL
61SNA30
31SVA610
31SNA800
31SNAM10
31SVAQ10
HON-R
Form Description
2006/07 Honda Civic 2/4 door
Service Manual
2006/07 Honda Civic 2/4 door
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2006 Model Series Honda Civic 2/4 door
Body Repair Manual
2007 Honda Civic 2-door
Owner’s Manual
2007 Honda Civic
Navigation System Manual
2007 Honda Civic
Honda Service History
2007 Honda Civic 2-door
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years
Indicate Year and Model Desired
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.95
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
296
NOTE: Dealers and companies, please provide dealer or company name,
and the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be
sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
...Accessories and Modifications . 186
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 77
............Accessory Power Sockets . 104
................Adding Engine Coolant . 226
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 223
.......Adjusting the Steering Wheel . 74
.........Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21
..............Air Conditioning System . 110
.........................................Usage . 113
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 244
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 181
......................................Antifreeze . 226
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 59, 204
...................................Operation . 204
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 172
Anti-theft Steering Column
..............................................Lock . 77
................................Audio System . 115
.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 79
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19
.............Automatic Speed Control . 175
..............Automatic Transmission . 198
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 280
...............Checking Fluid Level . 230
.......................................Shifting . 198
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 198
................Shift Lever Positions . 198
....................Shift Lock Release . 201
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 57, 265
............................Jump Starting . 261
..............................Maintenance . 250
............................Specifications . 281
..............................Before Driving . 179
....................................Belts,Seat .8,18
.........................Beverage Holders . 104
..................................Booster Seats . 47
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 204
.............Break-in, New Linings . 180
....................Bulb Replacement . 238
...........................................Fluid . 232
.......................................Parking . 102
..........................System Design . 203
.................System Indicator . 58, 267
........................Wear Indicators . 203
.............................Braking System . 203
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 180
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 72
........................Brights, Headlights . 71
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 238
..............................Brake Lights . 238
................Front Parking Lights . 237
........Front Side Marker Lights . 237
.................................Headlights . 234
.........High-mount Brake Light . 239
............................Specifications . 281
....................Turn Signal Lights . 237
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 234
............................Capacities Chart . 280
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 50
.............................Carrying Cargo . 188
Index
A
B
C
INDEX
I
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
.........................................CD Care . 169
..........................CD Changer . 131, 153
.....CD Changer Error Messages . 133
..............................CD Player . 126, 146
.CD Player Error Messages . 131, 153
..................................Ceiling Light . 107
........................Certification Label . 278
.................................Chains, Tires . 249
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 255
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 224
......................................When to . 211
...Charging System Indicator . 57, 265
..............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 67
............Checklist, Before Driving . 193
.....................................Child Safety . 32
..............................Booster Seats . 47
...................................Child Seats . 39
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 32, 35
..........................................Infants . 37
............................Large Children . 46
.........................................LATCH . 41
......................Risks with Airbags . 33
.............................Small Children . 38
.........................................Tethers . 45
...........................Warning Labels . 51
.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 33
Child Seats
......................................Installing . 40
...........................Lower Anchors . 41
......................................Selecting . 39
................Tether Anchor Points . 45
Cleaning
...................................Seat Belts . 239
..............................................Clock . 173
...................................Clutch Fluid . 232
........................CO in the Exhaust . 285
......................................Coat Hook . 105
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 194
......................Compact Spare Tire . 254
.................Console Compartment . 104
.................Consumer Information . 292
.............Controls, Instruments and . 53
Coolant
........................................Adding . 226
....................................Checking . 185
.........................Proper Solution . 226
...................Temperature Gauge . 67
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 285
................Cruise Control Indicator . 62
............Cruise Control Operation . 175
...................................Cup Holders . 104
....Customer Service Information . 292
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 3, 54
................Daytime Running Lights . 72
Daytime Running Lights
.......................................Indicator . 62
.................................Dead Battery . 261
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 294
................Defogger, Rear Window . 73
..............Defrosting the Windows . 114
....................................Dimensions . 280
...............Dimming the Headlights . 71
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 230
..................................Engine Oil . 183
..........................Directional Signals . 71
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 203
.......................................Disc Care . 169
............................Disc Player . 126, 146
..................Display Change Button . 65
Index
D
II
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
＊
CONTINUED
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 226
Doors
.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 79
..............Locking and Unlocking . 78
......................Power Door Locks . 79
........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 282
Downshifting, Manual
.............................Transmission . 195
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 191
....................................Economy . 185
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 241
..............................Economy, Fuel . 185
..................................Emergencies . 253
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 261
...........Brake System Indicator . 267
................Changing a Flat Tire . 255
.....Charging System Indicator . 265
..................Checking the Fuses . 268
.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 73
............................Jump Starting . 261
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 265
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 266
..................Overheated Engine . 263
.......................................Towing . 274
.........................Emergency Brake . 102
......................Emergency Flashers . 73
......................Emergency Towing . 274
............Emergency Trunk Opener . 90
.......................Emissions Controls . 285
.............Emissions Testing, State . 288
Engine
............Adding Engine Coolant . 226
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 67
.........................If It Won’t Start . 259
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 57, 266
.......................Oil Life Indicator . 211
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 57, 265
.............................Oil, Synthetic . 223
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 222
...............................Overheating . 263
............................Specifications . 280
....................Speed Limiter . 197, 200
.......................................Starting . 194
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 181
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 285
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 50
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 16
....................................Fan Control . 111
.........................................Features . 109
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 181
Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 241
...............................................Oil . 224
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 73
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 255
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 230
..........................................Brake . 232
.........................................Clutch . 232
..............Manual Transmission . 231
..........................Power Steering . 233
..................Windshield Washer . 229
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 167
...........................Folding Rear Seat . 95
..........................Four-way Flashers . 73
Index
E
F
INDEX
III
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 23
Front Seat
......................................Adjusting . 91
.....................................Airbags . 9, 23
.................................................Fuel . 180
..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 67
....................................Economy . 185
......................Fill Door and Cap . 181
...........................................Gauge . 67
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 67
................Octane Requirement . 180
...............................Oxygenated . 180
........................Tank, Refueling . 181
..............................Fuse Locations . 272
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 268 .............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 234
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 73
Headlights
........................................Aiming . 234
............Daytime Running Lights . 72
..................High Beam Indicator . 62
........................Reminder Beeper . 71
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 234
...................................Turning on . 71
..............................Head Restraints . 94
.............................Heated Mirrors . 102
.....................Heating and Cooling . 110
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 194
............................High Beam Lever . 71
..............High-mount Brake Light . 239
..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 182
..................................................Horn . 69
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 232
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 278
..............If the Engine Overheats . 263
..............If the Engine Wont Start . 259
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 75
...........................................Switch . 77
............Timing Control System . 286
........................Immobilizer System . 76
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
Indicators
..............ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 59
Brake (Parking and Brake
....................................System) . 58
................Charging System . 57, 265
.............................Cruise Control . 62
DRL (Daytime Running
......................................Lights) . 62
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 185
.........................................Gasoline . 180
...........................................Gauge . 67
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 62
................Octane Requirement . 180
........................Tank, Refueling . 181
................Gas Station Procedures . 181
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 67
...............................................Fuel . 67
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 198
..............Manual Transmission . 196
......................................Glove Box . 104
Gross Axle Weight Rating
.....................................(GAWR) . 189
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.....................................(GVWR) . 189
Index
G
H
I
IV
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Indicators
...................................High Beam . 62
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 59
....................................Lights ON . 63
......................................Low Fuel . 63
................Low Oil Pressure . 57, 265
..........Maintenance Minder . 60, 211
....................Malfunction Lamp . 266
....................................REV Limit . 61
..........................Security System . 63
...........................Side Airbag Off . 58
...............................................SRS . 58
.................................Trunk Open . 62
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 59
..............................Washer Level . 61
Indicators, Instrument
.......................................Panel . 55, 57
...............................Infant Restraint . 37
Infant Seats
......................................Installing . 40
................Tether Anchor Points . 45
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 244
........................Information Display . 64
.................................Inside Mirror . 101
.............................Inspection, Tire . 245
....................Installing a Child Seat . 40
........................Instrument Panel . 3, 54
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 72
................Instrument and Controls . 53
...............................Interior Lights . 107
........................................Introduction . i
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 256
.......................................Jack, Tire . 255
................................Jump Starting . 261
..................................................Keys . 75
.......................Label, Certification . 278
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 71
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19
...............................LATCH System . 41
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 234
...............................Indicators . 55, 57
.........................................Parking . 71
..................................Turn Signal . 71
....................................Load Limits . 189
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 77
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 77
............................Fuel Fill Door . 181
.................................Power Door . 79
...........................................Trunk . 89
........................Low Coolant Level . 185
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 63
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 57, 265
................................Lower Anchors . 41
...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 195
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 280
...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 188
Index
INDEX
J
K
L
V
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
..................................Maintenance . 209
..................................Items . 214, 217
........................................Minder . 211
.................Minder Indicator . 60, 211
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 216
.................................Record . 218-219
..........................................Safety . 210
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 57, 266
...................Manual Transmission . 195
...............Checking Fluid Level . 231
.......................................Shifting . 195
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 231
....................................Mats, Floor . 240
...............................Meters, Gauges . 64
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 181
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 101
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 187
.........................................Moonroof . 99
................................MP3 . 127, 147, 156
...................Neutral Gear Position . 199
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 180
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 196
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 278
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 180
.........................................Odometer . 65
...............................Odometer, Trip . 65
Oil
........................Change, How to . 224
......................Change, When to . 211
......................Checking Engine . 183
..............Pressure Indicator . 57, 265
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 223
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 77
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 285
............................Outside Mirrors . 101
....................Overheating, Engine . 263
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 216
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 181
..............Panel Brightness Control . 72
........................Park Gear Position . 199
...........................................Parking . 202
...............................Parking Brake . 102
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 58, 267
........................Parking Lights . 71, 237
Parking Over Things that
....................................Burn . 202, 287
..........................................PC Card . 155
.............................PGM-FI System . 286
........................Playing a Disc . 126, 146
.........................Playing a PC Card . 155
...................................Pollen Filter . 241
..........................Power Door Locks . 79
......Power Socket Locations . 103, 105
....................Power Steering Fluid . 233
..............................Power Windows . 97
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16
........................Preparing to Drive . 193
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 16
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
Index
N
O
PM
VI
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
＊
＊
CONTINUED
........................Protecting Children . 32
.......................General Guideline . 32
................Installing a Child Seat . 40
.......................Protecting Infants . 37
.......Protecting Larger Children . 46
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
.................Selecting a Child Seat . 39
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 45
.............................Using LATCH . 41
...................Radiator Overheating . 263
...........Radio/Disc Sound System . 116
Radio/Disc/PC Card Sound
........................................System . 134
...Recommended Tire Pressures . 244
.................Radio Theft Protection . 172
...................Readiness Codes . 266, 288
Rear Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 238
............................Rear Seat Access . 92
..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 95
..........................Rear View Mirror . 101
.................Rear Window Defogger . 73
................Reclining the Seat-backs . 91
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 196
........................................Refueling . 181
.................Reminder Indicators . 55, 57
.......................Remote Transmitter . 86
Replacement Information
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 241
................Engine Oil and Filter . 224
..........................................Fuses . 268
................................Light Bulbs . 234
................Maintenance Minder . 211
................................Spark Plugs . 280
......................Tires and Wheels . 247
.............................Wiper Blades . 241
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 20
..........Reporting Safety Defects . 294
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 185, 226
...............................Restraint, Child . 32
..................Reverse Gear Position . 199
...........................Reverse Lockout . 197
................................Rotation, Tire . 246
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 294
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags . 9
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 51
...............................Safety Messages . ii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18
...............Additional Information . 18
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
.....................................Cleaning . 239
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19
................................Maintenance . 20
Reminder Indicator and
................................Beeper . 18, 57
...................System Components . 18
...............Use During Pregnancy . 16
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder
.....................................Belt . 14, 19
.................................................Seats . 91
.........................Seats, Folding Rear . 95
Index
INDEX
S
R
VII
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
＊
＊
............................Security System . 174
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39
...............................Serial Number . 278
...........................Service Intervals . 211
...........................Service Manual . 295
.........Service Station Procedures . 181
..........................Setting the Clock . 173
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 198
........................Shift Lock Release . 201
................................Side Airbags . 9, 26
..........................Off Indicator . 29, 58
..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 28
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 237
...............................Signaling Turns . 71
..................................Snow Chains . 249
.....................................Snow Tires . 248
...........Sockets, Accessory Power . 105
................................Sound System . 116
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 254
............................Specifications . 281
....................................Spark Plugs . 280
................................Specifications . 280
................................Speed Control . 175
........................Speed Limiter . 197, 200
..........SRS, Additional Information . 21
...Additional Safety Precautions . 31
.............................Airbag Service . 30
......Airbag System Components . 21
How the Passenger Airbag
...............Off Indicator Works . 29
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 23
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
.............................SRS Indicator . 28, 58
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 77
.......................Starting the Engine . 194
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 194
................With a Dead Battery . 261
..............State Emissions Testing . 288
........Steam Coming from Engine . 263
Steering Wheel
................................Adjustments . 74
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 77
.......Steering Wheel Buttons . 170, 175
...................Stereo Sound System . 115
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 252
Supplemental Restraint
..................................System .9,21
......................................Servicing . 30
.........................SRS Indicator . 28, 58
...................System Components . 21
.........................................SVC . 120, 144
..................................Synthetic Oil . 223
..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 238
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 253
Technical Descriptions
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 282
.....Emissions Control Systems . 285
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 181
Three Way Catalytic
.......................Converter . 286, 287
.......................Temperature Gauge . 67
.....................Tether Anchor Points . 45
................Theft Protection, Radio . 172
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 286, 287
..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 74
Index
T
VIII
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
＊
＊
..........................Time, Setting the . 173
....................................Tire Chains . 249
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 255
...............................................Tires . 243
..............................Air Pressure . 244
.........................Checking Wear . 245
..........................Compact Spare . 254
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 282
......................................Inflation . 243
..................................Inspection . 245
.....................................Labeling . 284
..............................Maintenance . 246
...................................Replacing . 247
......................................Rotating . 246
...........................................Snow . 248
............................Specifications . 281
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 255
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 208
................Emergency Wrecker . 274
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 230
Checking Fluid Level,
...................................Manual . 231
..................Fluid Selection . 230, 231
..............Identification Number . 278
.............Shifting the Automatic . 198
..................Shifting the Manual . 195
...................................Treadwear . 282
...................Treadwear Indicators . 245
.......................................Trip Meter . 65
................................................Trunk . 89
....................Emergency Opener . 90
........................................Opening . 89
............................Open Indicator . 62
....................................Turn Signals . 71
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 253
..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 282
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 180
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 226
......................Using a Booster Seat . 47
................................Vanity Mirror . 106
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 189
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 280
....Vehicle Identification Number . 278
.............................Vehicle Storage . 252
.....................................Ventilation . 112
.................................................VIN . 278
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 223
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
................Warning Button, Hazard . 73
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 51
....................Warranty Coverages . 293
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 229
.......................................Indicator . 62
.....................................Operation . 70
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 74
............Alignment and Balance . 246
..........................Compact Spare . 254
...................................Replacing . 247
..............................Wrench, Nut . 256
Windows
..................Operating the Power . 97
...........................Rear, Defogger . 73
Index
INDEX
U
V
W
IX
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
＊
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 70
...................................Defroster . 114
.......................................Washers . 70
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 241
.....................................Operation . 70
..............................WMA . 127, 147, 157
....................................Worn Tires . 245
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 274
:U.S.only
Index
X
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Manual Transmission Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX:
Si:
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX:
Si:
All models except Si:
DX, Canadian DX-G
LX, EX
Si
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
13.2 US gal (50
)
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.9 US qt (3.7
)
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
API Premium grade 5W-30
detergent oil (see page ).
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Capacity (including differential):
1.5 US qt (1.4
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
Front/Rear:
4.6 US qt (4.4
)
1.6 US qt (1.5
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Front/Rear:
Si:
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX:223
223
230
231
233
232
Main Menu
s
t
Main Menu
s
t
Main MenuMain Menu
s
t
Main Menu
